JP2009254470A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the impairment of a player's interest in the play by allowing the player to enjoy both prescribed presentation presented by a presentation presenting means and the movement of game media. <P>SOLUTION: The Pachinko machine includes: a plate-like game panel 599 disposed on the rear side of a front component member 601 having an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding game balls into a play zone; a floating presentation unit 2000 supported on the rear side of the game panel 599; guide shelves 1410 and 1414 for guiding game balls to the outside of the play zone on the upper side of the floating presentation unit 2000; an entrance 1412 allowing the game balls guided by the guide shelf 1410 to enter; a guide path for guiding the game balls entering the entrance 1412 downward; and a frame-shaped center generator 1400 having an outlet 1408 for discharging game balls onto the play zone via the guide path and supported on the front side of the game panel 599. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lot of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a gaming area where, for example, gaming balls are driven as gaming media, and at appropriate positions in the gaming area. Is equipped with a general winning opening, a variable winning opening with a movable piece (so-called tulip) that expands to the left and right so that the probability of entering the ball changes, a starting opening that opens the blades of the variable winning opening, etc. A predetermined number of game media are paid out when a game medium is awarded to the general winning opening, variable winning opening, and start opening.

  As this type of gaming machine, a frame-shaped center accessory is arranged at the approximate center of the game area, and an effect display means such as a liquid crystal display device is arranged behind the center accessory, and passes through the center actor frame. There is also known one in which a predetermined effect image displayed on the effect display means can be shown to a player and enjoyed (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition to the effect display means, an effect space in which the inside can be visually recognized from the player side is formed in the approximate center of the game area, and the effect is displayed by the artificial wind blown upward from the bottom in the effect space. Proposals have been made that entertain the player and enhance the interest by performing the play according to the game state (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2008-043687 A JP 2004-242913 A

  However, in a conventional gaming machine, an approximately center portion in the vertical direction in which effect presentation means capable of presenting a predetermined effect to a player such as a liquid crystal display device (effect display means) or an effect space is arranged in the game area. However, in order to enjoy the movement of the game medium, the game medium flows down to some extent (for example, several times the outer diameter of the game medium), so that the game area is relatively smaller than the width of the game area. As a result, the width of the effect presentation means and the like becomes narrower, and it becomes difficult to see the effect by the effect presentation means and the like, which reduces the interest of the player.

  Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention is capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player by delighting both the predetermined presentation presented by the presentation presentation means and the movement of the game medium. The issue is to provide

Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A frame-shaped front component member having an outer rail and an inner rail capable of guiding a game medium to an upper part in the game area, and defining an outer periphery of the game area;
A plate-like shape that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and has an opening having a predetermined shape at an inner periphery penetrating in a front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area, and defining a rear end of the game area. A game panel,
An effect presentation means that is supported on the rear side of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side through the opening, and can present a predetermined effect to the player according to the game state;
The predetermined presentation presented by the presentation presenting means is formed in a frame shape so as to cover the opening of the gaming panel so as to be visible from the player side and supported by the gaming panel from the front side, A guide shelf that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel and is driven into the upper part of the game area on the upper side of the presentation means, and is guided by the guide shelf to the outer peripheral side of the game area. The entrance where the game medium guided to the outer peripheral side is allowed to enter, the game medium that has entered the entrance is guided to the rear side of the front side of the game panel, and then lower than the upper part of the effect presentation means. And a center role having at least a discharge port for discharging the game medium guided by the guide path into the game area at the front surface of the game panel. And characterized in that.

  Here, the “game panel” may be in the form of a plate, and as its material, “wooden plywood”, acrylic resin, “polycarbonate resin”, “ABS resin”, “polypropylene”, “polyarylate resin”, “Methacrylic resin”, “glass”, and the like. When the gaming panel is transparent, it is desirable to use an acrylic resin as the gaming panel, and this acrylic resin has higher transparency than other transparent members and is disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel. It is possible to make the movable accessory, the effect display means, etc. easier to see.

  Further, as the “effect presentation means”, “effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image”, “thing having an effect space in which a plurality of floating bodies can float in a space independent of the game area” , “A movable decorative body having a decorative body that is movable along a predetermined route”, and the like.

  The “guide shelf” may be any one that is formed so as to be lowered from a predetermined position in the left-right direction toward one outer peripheral side and the other outer peripheral side. Things ”,“ Things formed in a curved shape ”,“ Things formed in a staircase shape ”,“ Things formed by appropriately combining straight lines and curves ”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine has a gaming area where the gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, an outer rail and an inner rail capable of guiding the gaming medium to the upper part of the gaming area, and has an outer periphery of the gaming area. A frame-shaped front component member that forms a partition, and an inner periphery that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area has a predetermined shape, and A plate-like game panel that defines an end, and supported on the rear side of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side through the opening, and can provide a predetermined effect to the player according to the game state An effect presenting means and a predetermined effect presented by the effect presenting means are formed in a frame shape so as to cover the opening of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side and supported by the game panel from the front side, Above the presentation means A game shelf that protrudes forward from the front of the game panel and is driven into the upper part of the game area can be guided to the outer periphery of the game area, and a game medium guided to one outer periphery by the guide shelf can enter. It was guided by the guideway that was made to be able to be guided below the upper part of the presentation means after guiding the entrance to the entrance, the game medium that entered the entrance to the rear side of the front of the game panel A center accessory having at least a discharge port for discharging the game medium into the game area on the front surface of the game panel is provided.

  As a result, the game medium driven into the upper part of the game area by the player's operation is guided to the outer peripheral side of the game area by the guide shelf above the effect presentation means. The width in the left-right direction of the effect presentation means arranged on the side can be made as wide as the width of the game area as much as possible, and the effect presentation means can be made wider and presented by the effect presentation means It can make it easy to see the production. In addition, it is possible to divide the area where the game medium flows down in the game area into the upper side and the lower side by the guide shelf, and the player by the driving operation aimed at the upper side of the guide shelf (the player's The game media movement (which greatly reflects the intention), and the game media can cause accidental movement due to obstacle nails, etc. below the guide shelf (release port) The lower side can be sharpened by the movement of the game medium, and the player can be entertained. Therefore, it is possible to entertain both the predetermined effect presented by the effect presenting means and the movement of the game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the game medium guided to one of the outer peripheral sides by the guide shelf and entering the entrance is once guided to the rear side from the front of the game panel by the guide path, and then again into the game area through the discharge port. So that the player can clearly recognize that the game area is divided between the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf (below the outlet). Even if the movement of the game medium is different between the upper side and the lower side of the shelf, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as much as possible, and the enjoyment of different game media is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the gaming panel may be formed in a transparent plate shape, which makes it possible to place a decorative body with a predetermined decoration at a position corresponding to the gaming area and different from the presentation means, on the front of the gaming panel. Compared to conventional gaming machines with pictures, etc., it can be decorated with a more three-dimensional effect, can be made more prominent than other gaming machines, and enhance the appeal to players Therefore, the possibility of selecting this gaming machine as a gaming machine to be played can be increased.

  In addition, a gate entrance where the winning probability of the variable winning opening is changed by receiving a game medium, a winning opening from which a predetermined number of gaming media are paid out by receiving the gaming medium, and the like are provided above the guide shelf (admission entrance). As a result, the gate entrance and the winning opening are arranged at the upper part of the gaming area where the game medium is driven by the player's operation. It becomes possible to make it easy to aim directly, and it is possible to entertain the game medium driving operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a stage in which the game medium can roll in a predetermined direction is provided in a frame of the center object, and a warp inlet is provided above the guide shelf (advance entrance) to guide and supply the game medium onto the stage. As a result, the warp entrance located at the upper part of the game area can be directly aimed by the game medium driving operation, and the game medium driving operation can be enjoyed and the game can be enjoyed. , And can easily aim at the warp entrance and gate entrance according to the gaming situation, etc., and can increase the responsiveness (response) to the player's intention, It is possible to make the game progress smoothly, and it is possible to improve the game tempo and make the game machine more entertaining for the player.

  In addition, the game medium guided to the other outer periphery side by the guide shelf may be guided into the game area below the effect presentation means, whereby the game medium is guided to the other outer periphery side. As a result, the game medium flows down to the lower part of the game area and the movement of the game medium can be enjoyed, so that the game medium is not inserted into the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf. The operation can be performed carefully, and an effect of concentrating the player on the game can be expected.

  Further, the discharge port may be arranged beside the effect presentation means, so that the game medium is drawn from the game area from the discharge port as compared with the case where the discharge port is arranged below the effect presentation means. Since the height to the outlet to be discharged becomes higher, and the number of times that the game medium abuts against the obstacle nail or the like during that time increases, the game medium released from the discharge port spreads more widely and is located at the lower part of the game area. The game media can flow down in a wider range, and the movement of the game media can be enjoyed, and the possibility of winning a prize opening located at the lower part of the game area is increased, and the interest for the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming panel may be a transparent plate and may be provided with a panel holder that detachably holds the gaming panel from the front side. Since it is not bonded and fixed, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of assembling steps for assembling the gaming panel and the panel holder, and the gaming panel and the panel holder can be easily attached and detached. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in disassembly at the time of disposal.

  In addition, the game medium guided in the taxiway may be visible from the player side, so that the movement of the game medium circulating in the taxiway can be enjoyed and the game medium in the taxiway can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to prevent feelings of anxiety about gaming media and feelings of distrust to gaming machines by making the movement of gaming media invisible, and playing games with peace of mind, It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  In addition, when the gaming panel is formed in a transparent plate shape and includes a panel holder that detachably holds the gaming panel from the front side, a holding step portion that is recessed rearward from the front side is formed in the panel holder, The game panel may be held by the holding step portion, which makes it possible to store the game panel within the thickness of the panel holder, and the game board is configured by the game panel, the panel holder, the front component member, etc. However, an increase in the thickness can be suppressed. Therefore, since the game board can be made to be approximately the same size as the existing one, the parts other than the game board in the gaming machine can be made common with the existing one and placed on the existing production line. It is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs. Further, the thickness of the panel holder is set to a thickness (18 to 21 mm, preferably about 19 mm) corresponding to the thickness of the wooden plywood part in the conventional game board, and the thickness of the game panel is set to the thickness of the panel holder. It is desirable that the thickness is about 8 to 10 mm, which is about half the thickness. In detail, there are fears that the obstacle nail cannot be satisfactorily held when the thickness is less than 8 mm due to the planting of many obstacle nails in the game panel, and the thickness is more than 10 mm. This is because even if it is thick, the holding of the obstacle nail is not improved, and the weight of the game panel is increased more than necessary. Thereby, the thickness of the panel holder and game panel which consist of transparent plates (resin etc.) can be optimized.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
"The center role is
A gate entrance that communicates with the guide path and is disposed above the entrance and that is capable of receiving a game medium;
A variable winning opening in which the acceptance probability can be changed in accordance with the reception of the game medium at the gate entrance, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, and a predetermined number of game media is paid out by the reception of the game medium. It is further equipped with ".

  Here, the “variable winning opening” is “the base end side is pivotally supported and the front end side is a free end extending upward from the base end side, and the base end side pivot shaft is With a pair of movable pieces (so-called electric tulips) arranged so as to face the direction and opposed to each other on both the left and right sides of the prize opening, "the base end side is pivotally supported rotatably In addition, the tip end side is a free end extending upward from the base end side, and includes an opening / closing piece that can open and close a winning opening arranged to open in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction (for example, an attacker, A prize winning award, etc.) ".

  According to the structure of the means 2, after further providing a gate entrance which is arranged above the advancement entrance and communicates with the guide path and is capable of receiving a game medium, An acceptance probability that can be changed according to the acceptance of game media at the gate entrance, and is provided at a predetermined position in the game area and is provided with a variable prize opening for paying out a predetermined number of game media upon acceptance of the game media. It is.

  As a result, the gate entrance is arranged above the entrance, and the game area is provided with a variable prize opening whose acceptance probability (winning probability) changes according to the entry of the game medium into the gate entrance. When the game medium that has been driven into the upper part of the game area enters the gate entrance, the probability that the game medium is accepted into the variable prize opening changes (for example, increases), and there is a chance that the game medium is accepted into the variable prize opening. It becomes high and it becomes possible to get an opportunity to pay out more game media, and it is possible to concentrate the player's interest at the gate entrance and variable prize opening, and entertain the player, and the interest in the game is reduced Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the gate entrance is arranged above the entrance entrance, that is, above the gaming area separated by the guide shelf, it is easy to aim the gate entrance directly by the game medium driving operation. It is possible to suitably exhibit the skill of the game, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating by making a game medium driving operation enjoyable.

  In addition, the variable winning opening may be arranged at the lower part in the game area downstream of the discharge opening, so that, as described above, the gate entrance by the game medium driving operation at the upper part of the game area due to the presence of the guide shelf. In the lower part of the game area, it can be changed by changing the probability of accepting a variable prize opening due to the entrance of the game medium to the gate entrance against the accidental movement of the game medium due to obstacle nails, etc. It is possible to enjoy an accidental game with a higher possibility of being accepted into the winning opening, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Also, in the lower part of the game area, the player's involvement with respect to the flowing-down game medium is reduced and the accidental (passive) element is increased, but the player aims at the game medium to enter the gate entrance. Since the variable prize opening at the bottom of the game area changes, it is possible to make the player seem to have changed the variable prize opening arranged at the bottom of the game area according to the player's intention. A game can be actively played even in the lower part, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The center role is
A warp entrance that is arranged above the entrance and into which a game medium can enter;
The game medium that has entered the warp entrance can be rolled at least in the left-right direction, and the rolled game medium can be returned to the game area below the effect presenting means, and the effect presenting means And a stage disposed substantially along the lower portion of the head.

  Here, as the “stage”, “the one having a curved rolling surface whose lowest center in the left-right direction is the lowest”, “the both ends in the left-right direction are the highest, and a plurality of places in the left-right direction are the most `` With rolling surfaces curved in a wave shape so as to be lower '', `` Rolling surfaces extending in the left-right direction with a predetermined width are arranged in a plurality of steps so as to gradually decrease from the rear side toward the front side ”,“ Having an entrance that allows a game medium to be released from a predetermined position in the game area when the game medium enters a predetermined position on the rolling surface ”,“ predetermined when the game medium is received at a predetermined position on the rolling surface ” And the like having a winning opening through which a number of game media are paid out.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, the warp inlet that is arranged above the entrance and is allowed to enter the game medium and the game medium that has entered the warp inlet can roll at least in the left-right direction. In addition, the game medium that has been rolled can be returned to the game area below the effect presentation means, and further provided with a stage disposed substantially along the lower portion of the effect presentation means.

  As a result, when the game medium driven into the upper part of the game area enters the warp inlet disposed above the entrance, it is supplied onto the stage disposed on the upper surface of the lower frame in the frame of the center accessory. Since it can be released (refluxed) into the gaming area after rolling the stage, it becomes possible to make a gaming machine having the same atmosphere as a gaming machine having a conventional stage, and is used to the conventional gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to easily select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play.

  In addition, since the warp inlet for supplying game media to the stage is disposed above the entrance, the warp entrance is likely to be disposed above the game area, and the warp entrance is operated by the game medium driving operation. Can be made easy to aim at, and it can suppress that the interest to a game falls by performing the driving operation aiming at a warp entrance.

  A winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a starting winning opening, a large winning opening, etc.) may be arranged on the lower side (downstream side) of the stage, so that the game medium rolls on the stage. Then, since it is possible to increase the possibility of being accepted into the winning opening, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a driving operation aiming at the warp entrance, and to make the game medium driving operation more enjoyable, It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting a game medium at a winning opening, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
“The variable prize opening is
It is what is arrange | positioned under the said stage in the said center accessory. "

  According to the structure of the means 4, the variable winning opening is arranged on the lower side of the stage in the center accessory.

  This increases the possibility that the game medium rolls on the stage and is accepted into the variable prize opening, so that the player first drives the game medium to aim at the gate entrance. Once the game medium enters the gate entrance, it is possible to perform a driving operation aiming at the warp entrance, and after the game medium that has entered the warp entrance rolls on the stage, it is returned to the game area. However, at that time, the probability of accepting the variable prize opening is changed by the game medium that has entered the gate entrance first, and the game medium is allowed to be accepted into the variable prize opening with a high probability. It is possible to prevent the player from getting monotonous in the game medium driving operation, and to change the game medium driving operation and the player's line-of-sight position. Vs. Te can be given the tempo, interest and entertain the player can be prevented from lowering.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
"The center role is
The game medium guided to the other outer periphery side by the guide shelf is guided into the game area below the effect presentation means substantially along the outer periphery of the game area. To do.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the game medium in which the center role is guided to the other outer periphery side by the guide shelf is guided into the game area below the effect presentation means substantially along the outer periphery of the game area. It is what I did.

  Thereby, the game medium guided to the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf is guided to the game area below the effect presentation means, and when the game medium is guided to the other outer peripheral side, Since the game medium flows down to the lower part of the game area and it becomes impossible to enjoy the movement of the game medium, the game medium should be carefully operated so that the game medium is not guided to the other outer periphery by the guide shelf. It is possible to prevent the game from being played casually and to expect an effect of concentrating the player on the game.

  It should be noted that the guide shelf is configured so that a side that leads to one outer peripheral side and a side that leads to the other outer peripheral side can be clearly understood (for example, “the guide shelf is separated in the left-right direction”, “one side And the other outer peripheral side of the other outer peripheral side may be different in the size of the game area on the upper side of the other outer peripheral side. Attention can be drawn so as not to drive the medium, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Means 6: In the configuration of means 5,
"The center role is
The guide shelf is formed so as to guide the game medium driven to the side opposite to the side where the inner rail is disposed with respect to the substantially center in the left-right direction to the other outer peripheral side. It is characterized by that.

  By the way, the relationship between the direction in which the game medium is driven in the game area (the direction opposite to the side where the inner rail is disposed) and the position where the entrance (one outer peripheral side) is disposed is as follows: If the entrance is arranged in the direction in which the player is driven, it is easy for the game medium that has been driven to enter the entrance, and the difficulty of the game medium driving operation is reduced. There is a risk of getting bored with the operation and reducing the interest of the game.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the game medium driven in the guide shelf in the center accessory to the side opposite to the side where the inner rail is disposed with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction is guided to the other outer peripheral side. Is formed.

  Thereby, the other outer peripheral side is arranged on the side opposite to the side where the inner rail is arranged, that is, the other outer peripheral side is arranged in the direction in which the game medium is driven in the game area. Therefore, if the game medium is easily inserted, the game medium is easily guided to the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf, so that the movement of the game medium can be enjoyed. It is possible to give a sense of tension to the operation, and to suppress the interest from being concentrated by focusing on the game.

  In addition, in order to allow game media to enter the entrance, gate entrance, warp entrance, etc., it is necessary to appropriately adjust the game media driving operation. It can be given, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the driving operation and to reduce the interest in the game.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The center role is
The gate inlet and the warp inlet are arranged on the same side as the side on which the inner rail is arranged with respect to the substantially center in the left-right direction.

  According to the structure of the means 7, the gate entrance and the warp entrance in the center accessory are arranged on the same side as the side on which the inner rail is arranged with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction.

  Thereby, the gate entrance and the warp entrance are arranged on the same side as the side on which the inner rail is arranged, and if the game medium driving strength exceeds a predetermined level by the game medium driving operation, the gate As game media passes above the entrance and warp entrance, it becomes difficult to enter the game media into the gate entrance and warp entrance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving operation from being random and becoming tired.

  Also, the gate entrance and the warp entrance are arranged on the same side as the side where the inner rail is arranged (the same side as the one outer peripheral side). Even if it does not enter the warp entrance, it is guided by the guide shelf to the entrance located on one outer peripheral side, and the game medium that has entered the entrance enters from the exit to the lower part of the game area via the guide path. Since it will be released, you can enjoy the movement of the game media flowing down in the lower part of the game area, and there is a chance to be accepted into the prize opening etc. arranged in the lower part of the game area, and the interest in the game will be reduced Can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 7,
"The center role is
The game medium guided in the guide path is formed so as to be visible from the player side ".

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the guide path in the center accessory is formed so that the game medium guided inside can be visually recognized from the player side.

  As a result, the game medium guided in the taxiway can be viewed from the player side, so some players may have anxiety due to the game medium becoming invisible or have a distrust in the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the player from playing, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by playing the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, since the game medium guided in the guide path can be viewed from the player side, the game released from the discharge port by entering the entrance and watching the game medium flowing toward the discharge port A sense of expectation can be enhanced for the medium, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

Means 9: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 8,
“The presentation means is
It has an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image ”.

  Here, examples of “effect display means” include “liquid crystal display device”, “EL display device”, “plasma display device”, “CRT”, “laser display”, and the like. Note that it is desirable to use a thin display means such as a liquid crystal display device, etc., so that the depth direction of the gaming machine can be made relatively wide, and the space between the game panel and the effect display means is widened. It is possible to arrange other effect presenting means having a movable accessory, an effect space, etc., or an ornament or the like for decorating the game area.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the effect presentation means is provided with effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image.

  Thereby, since the player can show a predetermined effect image through the frame of the center character, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained by the effect image and to reduce the interest in the game. In addition, as described above, the effect display means (effect presentation) arranged on the lower side and the rear side of the guide shelf by guiding the game medium driven to the upper part of the game area to the outer periphery side by the guide shelf of the center accessory Means) can be increased in size in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to arrange a larger effect display means, and to make the player more entertaining by showing the effect image on a large screen, The effect display means can make the gaming machine stand out, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 9,
“The presentation means is
An effect space forming member capable of forming an effect space of a predetermined area independent of the game area;
A plurality of floating bodies capable of floating in the production space formed by the production space forming member;
Transport means capable of transporting the floating body from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space outside the effect space forming member;
And a light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the effect space where the floating body floats by being conveyed by the conveying means.

  Here, as the “production space”, “a substantially plate-like space spreading in the vertical and horizontal directions”, “a cylindrical space extending in the vertical or horizontal direction”, “a rectangular parallelepiped shape” And the like, and “the space made into an elliptical sphere”.

  In addition, the “floating body” includes “a plate-shaped resin piece”, “a plate-shaped resin piece plastically deformed”, “a foam resin”, “a rubber”, “ Examples include “made of paper”, “made of metal”, “having buoyancy (in the air)”, “sequin”, and the like. Moreover, the thing of forms, such as "plate shape", "solid", "hollow", is mentioned. The surface may be a polyhedral shape, or a metal vapor deposition layer may be provided on the surface.

  Furthermore, as the “conveying means”, “the floating body is conveyed by the flow of the air flow (conveying flow)”, “the container that can accommodate the floating body is provided, and the floating body is moved by moving the container. ", Which has an endless annular belt on which a floating body can be placed, and which is designed to transport the floating body by driving the belt (using a belt conveyor)", Etc.

  The “light emitting means” includes “a plurality of light emitters capable of emitting only a single color light and having a plurality of different colors as a single color light”, “a plurality of colors from a single light source. "Equipped with a plurality of light emitters capable of emitting light", "four light emitters that independently emit red light, green light, blue light, and white light as one light emitter unit, and the light emitter unit ”And the like. Examples of the “light emitter” include “LED”, “incandescent lamp”, “fluorescent lamp”, “neon lamp”, and the like.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document 2, when a production (corresponding to a floating body) is blown up first by the operation of artificial wind, although it can give a certain impact to the player, The production that is blown up by the artificial wind falls and is blown up again by the artificial wind, and the production simply blows up in the production space and repeats the circulating action so that it falls, so it is monotonous. There is a risk that some players may get bored with the performance and reduce interest.

  Also, in the conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document 2, as described above, since the effect is circulated so that it falls when the effect is blown up, the effect such as “petals” or “snow crystals” In general, petals and snowflakes fall from the top to the bottom, but it seems that they are blown from the bottom to the top by an artificial wind. As a result, some players may feel uncomfortable with the productions that play, which may reduce interest in the game.

  On the other hand, a conventional gaming machine has a decorative member whose surface is shaped into a predetermined shape and has translucency, and an LED that is arranged on the rear side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the front (player side). The decorative body including the light emitting board is arranged at an appropriate position in the game area, and the decorative body is illuminated by decorating the light emitting board by emitting light according to the gaming state, etc. What is known to be entertained is known. There has also been proposed a device that can make the player more entertaining by moving the decorative body (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202622). However, in this type of gaming machine, the decoration member can be decorated in various manners (light emission effects) by changing the light emission color or lighting position of the LED mounted on the light emitting board in the decorative body. Although the position relationship between the decorative member and the light emitting substrate is always substantially constant in the decorative body, basically the same light emission effects are repeated, and some players are familiar with the decoration. There is a risk that the impact caused by the light emission effect of the body will fade and it will be easy to get bored, and the interest in games will be reduced.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the effect presentation means can float in the effect space formed by the effect space forming member capable of forming an effect space having a predetermined area independent of the game area, and the effect space forming member. A plurality of floating bodies, transport means that can transport the floating bodies from the lower part to the upper part of the presentation space outside the production space forming member, and light directed toward the production space where the floating bodies float by being conveyed by the conveyance means. And a light emitting means capable of irradiating the light.

  As a result, the player can show the player an effect space independent of the game area in which the game medium is driven through the frame of the center character, and is transported from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space in the effect space. The floating body floats and falls from the top to the bottom of the production space, and the movement of the floating body floating in the production space can show the player an effect that has not existed in conventional gaming machines. It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being lowered by attracting the player's interest with various effects. In addition, when the floating body floats and falls in the effect space, light is emitted from the light emitting means toward the effect space, so that the float can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the float with the light. At the same time, the floating body is freely floating in the production space, and the positional relationship between the light source and each floating body in the light emitting means changes every moment. A variety of light-emitting decorations on the body can be provided, and by showing the player various light-emitting effects, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, an effect having an effect space that is arranged below and behind the guide shelf by guiding the game medium that has been driven into the upper part of the game area to the outer periphery side by the guide shelf of the center accessory Since the size of the space forming member (production presentation means) in the left-right direction can be increased, the production space can be made larger, and the floating body that floats and falls in a wider area has a strong impact on the player. Can be made more conspicuous than other gaming machines, and this gaming machine can be selected as a gaming machine to play with increased appeal to the player.

  Furthermore, light is emitted from the light emitting means into the production space, and the light irradiated to the floating body or reflected to the player side by the floating body depending on the floating position of the floating body, the orientation of the floating body, etc. As light changes, one floating body is decorated with various colors, and the light emitting decoration changes every moment with the floating fall, which cannot be achieved with conventional decorations. A light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) that changes in a complex manner can be realized, and the impact on the player can be suppressed from being reduced by increasing the impact on the player.

  In addition, since the floating body is transported from the lower part to the upper part of the production space outside the production space forming member, the floating body always floats and moves (floating and falling) in the direction from the upper part to the lower part in the production space. As a result, it is possible to make the place where the floating body is transported difficult to see from the player side (so that it cannot be seen), and the floating body is continuously supplied to the player in the production space one after another. It is possible to show a floating effect such as “What is going on?” And to suppress the fun of the game by reducing the fun of floating by floating objects. it can. For example, if the floating body is regarded as “petals”, “snow crystals”, “confetti”, “fallen leaves”, etc., as described above, the floating body will float and fall. On the other hand, it is possible to show the floating fall of the floating body without a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to enjoy the movement of the floating body floating with a natural feeling, and it is possible to suppress the interest from being lowered due to the sense of incongruity.

  Furthermore, since the floating body is transported by the transport means, for example, when the floating body is transported by a transport flow consisting of an air flow, the floating body can transport the floating body at a minimum strength. The floating body is transported outside the production space forming member, that is, outside the production space, and the floating of the floating body in the production space changes greatly depending on the strength of the conveyance flow. Therefore, it is not necessary to precisely control the motor or the like that generates the transport flow, and it is possible to use inexpensive control and suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

  Also, the floating body is transported from the lower part to the upper part of the production space by the transport means, that is, the floating body is directed from the upper part to the lower part in the production space, so that the floating body falls by its own weight. It is possible to naturally reach the lower part of the production space, and it is possible to float the floating body without any sense of incongruity according to its physical properties (for example, shape, material, weight, etc.) , It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  In addition, as described above, since the floating body is suspended and dropped, when the floating body is transported by the transport means, it is possible to easily collect the floating body in the rendering space, and the floating body is floated in the rendering space. There is no need to separately provide a means for collecting the body, it is possible to prevent the production space from being narrowed by that means, and the production space can be widened as much as possible. The effect of the floating body can be further enhanced by floating, and an increase in the cost associated with the gaming machine can be suppressed. The bottom of the production space forming member (production space) may be formed so as to become lower in a predetermined direction (direction toward the transport means), thereby inclining the floating body that has fallen and dropped in the production space. The bottom can be guided in a predetermined direction, and the floating bodies can be collected more easily.

  Note that the surface of the floating body may have a high light reflectivity, so that the light from the lighting in the game hall where the light emitting means and the gaming machine are installed on the surface of the floating body floating in the production space. It can be reflected to the player side, and at that time, the floating body floats loosely, the light reflection direction changes, and it becomes possible to make the floating body appear to glitter, Show beautifully and enhance the effect of floating body.

  In addition, the surface of the floating body may be a polyhedron, so that the color and the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means are different for each surface, so that the light emitting decoration in one floating body is different for each surface. Thus, the floating body can be decorated with a variety of light emission, and the production effect by the floating body can be more enjoyed, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lowered.

  Further, the floating body may be transported by flowing a fluid such as air as the transporting means, whereby the container containing the floating body is moved as the transporting means or the belt conveyor is used. Compared to the case, the floating body can be transported only by means for supplying a fluid such as air (for example, a fan), and the structure relating to the transport means can be simplified and miniaturized. By reducing the size of the means, the production space (production space forming member) can be made relatively large, and the impact on the player can be increased by floating the floating body in a wider range. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, the floating body transported in the production space may be further provided with a diffusion floating means for diffusing in the production space, so that the floating body diffuses and floats in substantially the entire production space. The production effect by the body can be further enhanced, and it is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, the effect display means may be arranged behind the effect space, and the effect image of the effect display means may be visible through the effect space, thereby floating the front side of the effect image displayed on the effect display means. Since the body will be floating, the floating effects by the floating body can be made more diverse, the impact of the gaming machine can be increased, and it is difficult to get bored and to reduce the interest in gaming be able to.

Mean 11: In the gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A frame-shaped front component member having an outer rail and an inner rail capable of guiding a game medium to an upper part in the game area, and defining an outer periphery of the game area;
A plate-like shape that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and has an opening having a predetermined shape at an inner periphery penetrating in a front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area, and defining a rear end of the game area. A game panel,
An effect display means that is supported on the rear side of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side through the opening, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is arranged on the front side of the effect display means and the game area An effect space forming member capable of forming an effect space having an independent predetermined width, a plurality of floating bodies that can float in the effect space formed by the effect space forming member, and the effect space forming member Transport means that can be transported from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space outside, and a light emitting means that can emit light toward the effect space in which the floating body floats by being transported by the transport means, Effect presentation means capable of presenting to the player at least one of the effect image of the effect display means or the floating effect of the floating body floating in the effect space according to the game state;
A predetermined effect presented by the effect presentation means is formed in a frame shape so as to cover the opening of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side, and is supported by the game panel from the front side. Of the game media that protrudes forward from the front of the game panel above the effect presentation means and is driven into the upper part of the game area, the side on which the inner rail is disposed with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction; A game medium that is allowed to be guided to one outer peripheral side of the game area while flowing down to the same side, and that is driven to a side opposite to the side on which the inner rail is disposed with respect to a substantially center in the left-right direction. "A guide shelf that can be guided to the other outer peripheral side", "Advance entrance that allows the game medium guided to one of the outer peripheral sides by the guide shelf to enter", "A game that has entered the entrance Whether the media is the player side A guidance path that can be guided below the top of the presentation means after being guided to the rear side of the front side of the game panel in a state where it can be visually recognized. “Gate entrance arranged on the upper side and capable of receiving game media”, “A game media guided into the gate entrance or the entrance and guided by the guide path in the game area on the front surface of the game panel” “A discharge port that discharges to the warp”, “a warp entrance that is arranged at a position different from the entrance and the gate entrance above the entrance, and allows game media to enter”, and “a game that has entered the warp entrance” The medium can roll at least in the left-right direction, and the rolled game medium can be returned to the game area below the effect presentation means, and is arranged substantially along the lower portion of the effect presentation means. The And a center role for guiding the game medium guided to the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf into the game area below the presentation means substantially along the outer periphery of the game area. Things,
Arranged below the stage in the center role, the acceptance probability can be changed according to the acceptance of the game medium to the gate entrance, and a predetermined number of game media is paid out by the acceptance of the game medium. It has a variable prize opening ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine has a gaming area where the gaming medium is driven by the player's operation, an outer rail and an inner rail capable of guiding the gaming medium to the upper part of the gaming area, and an outer periphery of the gaming area. A frame-shaped front component member that forms a partition, and an inner periphery that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area has a predetermined shape, and An effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a plate-like game panel that defines an end, and is supported so as to be visible from the player side through the opening on the rear side of the game panel. An effect space forming member that is arranged on the front side and is capable of forming an effect space having a predetermined size independent of the game area, and a plurality of floating bodies that are floatable in the effect space formed by the effect space forming member Outside the production space forming member It has transport means that can transport from the lower part to the upper part of the exit space, and light emitting means that can emit light toward the effect space where the floating body floats by being transported by the transport means. The effect presentation means capable of presenting to the player at least one of the effect image of the means or the floating effect of the floating body floating in the effect space, and the predetermined effect presented by the effect presentation means can be viewed from the player side. Is formed in a frame shape so as to cover the opening of the gaming panel and is supported from the front side by the gaming panel, and “is projected forward from the front of the gaming panel above the presentation means and is driven into the upper part of the gaming area. Among the played game media, the game media that flows down to the same side as the side on which the inner rail is disposed with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction can be guided to one outer peripheral side of the game area, and is substantially in the left-right direction. “Guiding shelf capable of guiding the game medium driven to the opposite side to the side where the inner rail is disposed to the other side to the other outer peripheral side”, “Game medium guided to one outer peripheral side by the guiding shelf” ”Advance entrance that is allowed to enter”, “After the game medium that has entered the entrance is visible from the player side to the rear side from the front side of the game panel, it is lower than the upper part of the effect presentation means “Guidance path that can be guided”, “Gate entrance that is in communication with the guidance path and that is positioned above the entrance and that can receive game media”, “By entering the gate entrance or entrance and entering the entrance, “Discharge port for discharging the induced game medium into the game area at the front of the game panel”, “Warp entrance that is located above the entrance and different from the entrance and gate entrance and into which the game media can enter ”And“ Enter the warp entrance The game medium can be rolled at least in the left-right direction, and the rolled game medium can be returned to the game area below the effect presentation means, and is arranged substantially along the lower portion of the effect presentation means. A center role for guiding the game medium guided to the other outer periphery side by the guide shelf into the game area below the effect presentation means substantially along the outer periphery of the game area; It is arranged below the stage in the object, and has a variable prize opening that allows the acceptance probability to be changed according to the acceptance of the game medium at the gate entrance and that a predetermined number of game media is paid out by the acceptance of the game medium. It is made to let you.

  As a result, the game medium driven into the upper part of the game area by the player's operation is guided to the outer peripheral side of the game area by the guide shelf above the effect presentation means. The width of the effect presentation means arranged on the side can be made as wide as the width of the game area as much as possible, and the effect display means such as the effect display means and the effect space are made wider It is possible to make it easy to see the effect image and the floating body presented by the effect presentation means. In addition, it is possible to divide the area where the game medium flows down in the game area into the upper side and the lower side by the guide shelf, and the player by the driving operation aimed at the upper side of the guide shelf (the player's The game media movement (which greatly reflects the intention), and the game media can cause accidental movement due to obstacle nails, etc. below the guide shelf (release port) The lower side can be sharpened by the movement of the game medium, and the player can be entertained. Therefore, it is possible to entertain both the predetermined effect presented by the effect presenting means and the movement of the game medium, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the game medium guided to one of the outer peripheral sides by the guide shelf and entering the entrance is once guided to the rear side from the front of the game panel by the guide path, and then again into the game area through the discharge port. So that the player can clearly recognize that the game area is divided between the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf (below the outlet). Even if the movement of the game medium is different between the upper side and the lower side of the shelf, the discomfort given to the player can be reduced as much as possible, and the enjoyment of different game media is provided on the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, a gate entrance and a warp entrance are arranged above the entrance, and a variable prize opening whose acceptance probability changes due to the entry of game media into the gate entrance below the stage is provided. On the other hand, first, the game medium is driven to aim at the gate entrance, and when the game medium enters the gate entrance, the next operation to aim at the warp entrance can be performed, and then the warp entrance is entered. After the game media rolls on the stage, it will be returned to the game area. At that time, the probability of accepting the variable prize opening varies depending on the game media that entered the gate entrance first. The game medium can be accepted with high probability into the variable prize opening, and it is possible to prevent the game medium from being monotonous and to make it hard to get tired. It is possible to change the viewpoint position of the hammering operation and the player can impart tempo to a player, amusement entertained player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the gate entrance and the warp entrance are arranged above the entrance entrance, that is, above the gaming area separated by the guide shelf, the gate entrance and the warp entrance are operated by a game medium driving operation. The player's skill can be suitably demonstrated, and a game medium driving operation can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, the game medium guided to the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf is guided to the game area below the effect presentation means, and when the game medium is guided to the other outer peripheral side, Since the medium flows down to the lower part of the game area and the movement of the game medium cannot be enjoyed, the game medium should be carefully operated so that the game medium is not guided to the other outer periphery by the guide shelf. It is possible to prevent the game from being played casually and to expect the effect of allowing the player to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the other outer peripheral side is arranged on the opposite side to the left and right direction from the side where the inner rail is arranged, that is, the other outer peripheral side is arranged in the direction in which the game medium is driven in the game area. Therefore, if the game medium is easily inserted, the game medium is easily guided to the other outer peripheral side by the guide shelf, and the movement of the game medium can be prevented from being enjoyed. A sense of tension can be imparted to the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by concentrating on the game. In addition, in order to allow game media to enter the entrance, gate entrance, warp entrance, etc., it is necessary to appropriately adjust the game media driving operation. It can be given, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the driving operation and to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the game medium guided in the taxiway can be viewed from the player side, some players may have anxiety due to the fact that the game medium is not visible, or the game machine may have distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from being trapped, and it is possible to prevent a player from playing with peace of mind and reducing the interest of the player in the game. In addition, since the game medium guided in the guide path can be viewed from the player side, the game released from the discharge port by entering the entrance and watching the game medium flowing toward the discharge port A sense of expectation can be enhanced for the medium, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, since a predetermined effect image can be shown to the player through the frame of the center character, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained by the effect image and to reduce the interest in the game. In addition, as described above, the effect display means (effect presentation) arranged on the lower side and the rear side of the guide shelf by guiding the game medium driven to the upper part of the game area to the outer periphery side by the guide shelf of the center accessory Means) can be increased in size in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to arrange a larger effect display means, and to make the player more entertaining by showing the effect image on a large screen, The effect display means can make the gaming machine stand out, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to show the player an effect space that is independent of the game area where the game medium is driven through the frame of the center object, and in this effect space, the effect space is transported from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space. The floating body will float and fall from the upper part to the lower part in the production space, and the movement of the floating body floating in the production space can show the player an effect that has not existed in conventional gaming machines, It is possible to suppress the interest of the player from being reduced by attracting the player's interest with various effects. In addition, when the floating body floats and falls in the effect space, light is emitted from the light emitting means toward the effect space, so that the float can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the float with the light. At the same time, the floating body is freely floating in the production space, and the positional relationship between the light source and each floating body in the light emitting means changes every moment. A variety of light-emitting decorations on the body can be provided, and by showing the player various light-emitting effects, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, as described above, an effect having an effect space that is arranged below and behind the guide shelf by guiding the game medium that has been driven into the upper part of the game area to the outer periphery side by the guide shelf of the center accessory Since the size of the space forming member (production presentation means) in the left-right direction can be increased, the production space can be made larger, and the floating body that floats and falls in a wider area has a strong impact on the player. Can be made more conspicuous than other gaming machines, and this gaming machine can be selected as a gaming machine to play with increased appeal to the player.

  Furthermore, the effect display means is arranged behind the effect space, and the effect image of the effect display means can be visually recognized through the effect space, and the floating body floats in front of the effect image displayed on the effect display means. As a result, the floating effect by the floating body can be made more diverse, the impact of the gaming machine can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to difficulty in getting bored.

Means 12: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 11,
It is a pachinko machine.
Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium that is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. , A game area provided with appropriate entrances for game balls such as passing holes and arrival holes, a rail for guiding the game balls from the launcher to the game area, and entrance of the game balls guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the ball entrance or according to the entrance mode of the game balls to the plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as a “digipachi machine”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (game state detection And a special lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the incoming ball is detected by the incoming ball state detecting means, and a special symbol for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "With a symbol display means" or "Additionally, during special symbol fluctuations, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped in the symbol string, and characters, various articles, etc. Further comprising an effect display means for displaying an appropriate display by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc. " Game ball distribution Therefore, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 that are equipped with lottery means for performing a lottery, and generally called “aletachi machines”. For example, “a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the manner in which the game balls enter the ball port”.

  According to the structure of the means 12, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

Means 13: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 11,
It is a pachislot machine.
Here, the pachislot machine inserts a medal as an insertion medium, and rotates a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) after the medal is inserted. Then, the player can perform a game such that the symbol sequence constituted by each reel is variably displayed, and thereafter the variation display of each symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). Is to be done. In other words, it can be understood as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the structure of the means 13, in the pachislot machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

Means 14: In any one gaming machine from means 1 to means 11,
It is characterized by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.
Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, in a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, the operational effects of any of the means described above can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine that is capable of suppressing a player's interests from deteriorating by enjoying both the predetermined presentation presented by the presentation presentation means and the movement of the game medium. Can be provided.

[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101 and a lower part of the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4 are provided at the bottom of the back surface thereof. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5, and the door Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the present embodiment correspond to the horizontal frame of the present invention, and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 of the present example correspond to the vertical frame of the present invention. Yes.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fixing with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that the nail is easily driven. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. For this reason, the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness of the conventional wooden.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13 (B) to (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the concave portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed with a display).

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side support plate 15 formed as described above has a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. An attachment hole 31 for fastening with the fastening screw 32 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 31, and at the lower part thereof, the attachment hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66 is aligned with the fastening screw 34. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. An attachment hole 40 for attaching the projection 41 with the attachment screw 42 is formed, and an attachment hole 43 for attaching the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with the fastening screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described later in detail, a key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotated in one direction, whereby the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are engaged with the closing projections 38 and 41. The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing projection 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure that pivotally supports the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support fitting 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26 is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotably supported in a freely openable / closable manner.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support metal fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45 Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame 12 by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members thereof, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembly strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixedly projected. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A joint unit 480, a mounting base 280, and a frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, the more detailed structure of each said structural member which comprises the doorplate 5 is demonstrated.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is mounted with the gaming board 4 having larger dimensions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction than the conventional one, so the vertical dimension and the horizontal dimension of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from what is conventionally known.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 penetrates is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at an adjacent position on the opening side of the lid opening 105, and Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, and glass is formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and a mounting elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for mounting the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge shape in cross section such that the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame main body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 150 are balanced. To be installed to give The speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the surroundings are light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before explaining the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper reinforcement sheet metal 211 attached along the upper side rear surface of the door frame main body 100 and the shaft support side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached along the open-side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100, and a lower-side reinforcing metal sheet attached along the lower-side rear surface of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 that extends in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. And in the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the protrusion piece 272 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. Further, the post-crime projecting piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projecting piece 275 are in a state of projecting backward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 274 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to allow unauthorized tools to enter from the lower side of the glass unit 250, the unauthorized access from the lower direction of the front surface of the security cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the pre-crime projection pieces 272 and the unit frame 251. The anti-crime piece 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the crime prevention cover 270. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by the superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime projection piece 274.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 223 and 225 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 213, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5, Due to the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274, it is possible to further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 for attaching the ball feed unit 287 is formed in the lower part of the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286.

  The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to a reciprocating difference of a ball striking rod 687 of a ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges on the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electrical part or electrical part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle part 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 or the like incorporated in the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 with the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290. It is connected to the main control board 1350 (see FIGS. 78 and 110) of the main control board box 624 attached to 1186 and the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an external appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340, and facing the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time that the player spends for ball removal.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not possible even though the game is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns off the micro switch when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a sled ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction as the cam rotates. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. (Corresponding to the payout unit of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 And various components such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. The main body frame 3 constructed by mounting the main body frame 500 on the main body frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. is there.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side portion of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where cheating is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases, the support side is strong. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the distance between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is higher than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, which is attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3, and projecting forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the center portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. In addition, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage 609 (see FIG. 30), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent.

  Further, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixture mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that protrudes in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is linked to the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hitting basket 687 of the hitting ball launching apparatus 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle-passing opening 521. Is provided with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. Further, a cylindrical guide projection 525 protrudes rearward above the launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide projection 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to protrude inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  The upper rear wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 545, so that the lower end side is inclined. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to be a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4, such gaming device The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  In addition, the 1st side wall 540 in this embodiment is corresponded to the front side wall of this invention, and the 2nd side wall of this example, the 3rd side wall, and the 4th side wall are the back side wall of this invention. It corresponds.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. Then, when the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. Further, when the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 substantially coincide with each other when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, a prize ball guiding projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the shaft support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height thereof gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). Then, the prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of a locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546, and the support protrusion side 565 and the lock elastic claw 564 are used to support the shaft support side. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the cover body contact groove 567 of the cover body contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower back of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a security space 586 that receives the security projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, which will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 599, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. It is configured. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. The front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The front component 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the periphery of the game panel 599. And the outer shape is formed in the shape of the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. A mouth 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Furthermore, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projecting piece 275 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when it is pushed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates in the front and rear of the game board 4 is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch of the launch rail 515. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with a speaker notch 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive a rearward projecting portion of the speaker 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A notch 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are aligned and guided downstream. As a display control board box in which a display device control board for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74, etc.) as a display device arranged almost at the center of the game area 605 is placed on the back surface of the back box 621 A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction relatively larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of the board holder 623. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  In addition, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 provided in the board unit 1100 described later, a power supply board, and the like. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joining guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joining guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 that is fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, a flange portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the flange portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the working piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687, and the supply swing piece 289 swings to hit the ball. Balls flowing out from the supply port 288 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner in order to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 is a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Thus, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  In addition, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above the tip 688. It is approaching to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. An anti-rotation cam 698 and a motor cam formed at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 integrally formed with an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attachment to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698 and engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. This prevents rotation in the opposite direction. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the opposite direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the striking ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main structure of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 38A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 38A). 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball hitting device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanted cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the slide projecting piece 492 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the sliding protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is provided. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked / separated with the opening / closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. In addition, mounting flanges 733 that engage with the tank mounting groove 550 are formed on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the main body frame 3 is disposed on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower part of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 28, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a structure in which clogging of balls is difficult to occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of a sphere at the discharge port portion between the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball breaking projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize sphere tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced by the degree of polymerization of the spheres, and even if the spheres on the downstream side flow out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in a clogged sphere. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. A hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked from above into the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves into the respective passages 742 of the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that hang down and flow down the respective passages 742 flow in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate material (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It is composed of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back), and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. The winning ball guide projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot-side rear wall 546 is located on the rear side from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot-side rear wall 546 of the frame 3. The projection 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When the portion 772c no longer has a ball due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when the sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the sphere break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and as described later, the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 (FIG. 51). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the ball that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Thereby, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball has fallen in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has been cut (ball cut).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 that form a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825. It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted.

  The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the front end, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is provided with a bent passage wall 802. By being formed with, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 to be described later, and is finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 projects from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is supported on the pivot side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 is not possible.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, a mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is protruded long toward the rear side, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. is doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed.

  The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape. An engagement groove portion 828 that engages with the engagement protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection portion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fastening the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the above-mentioned payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described later). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown) to thereby fix the relay board 830 to the unit sub-unit. It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with the board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. In addition, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. .

  As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projecting / receiving sensor 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 disposed in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that transmits to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573 and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed downward while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to do.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 58, the full unit is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 forms the above-described dish unit 300. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection projection 909 projects forward from the bottom rocking plate 907 upstream. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 to be described next when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted to and supported by the shaft projection 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engaging pieces that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed along with a projection 924. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 projects downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball that collides with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball inlet 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and merged with the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connecting rod 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the tray unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving type full switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after paying out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball with a reduced momentum in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 that is attached in the vertical direction along the rear side edge on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the vertical center of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 540 and the main body frame 3 are A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG. 69) and at the lower end of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 64). Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. can do. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) of the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear part are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided in the U-shaped substrate 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. In addition, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. Makes the first fraud prevention member 1023 swing around the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restriction protruding piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the first tamper preventing member 1023 and the second tamper preventing member 1032 are connected to each other by the spring 1035 in the restricting protruding piece 1031, and the second tamper preventing member 1032 is biased by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped substrate. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with the connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the spring locking hole 1036 has one end with a U-shaped base 1001 spring locking piece. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 that is fixed to an inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 guides the mutual sliding operation.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. An escape notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and Consists of. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 has a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet slot 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The connection hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connection wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Further, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding in the horizontal direction By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are again locked with each other, and the door frame is brought into contact with the upper end of the door frame. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the overall length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the longitudinal side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 becomes the fraud prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 also starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the illustrated clockwise direction, and moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the illegal tool. Since the intrusion is blocked, it is not possible to easily perform fraud.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 that is extremely thin in comparison with the lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body is provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. Alternatively, a structure may be adopted in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not closely contacting the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b closely contacting the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIG. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Installed.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape. As shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side, and although not shown, the inside of the wiring opening 1124 is omitted. A recess for the relay board for attaching the door relay board is formed. Attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outwardly from both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  In addition, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly at the upper side so as to correspond to the out port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29). The downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 25, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. The box main body and the cover body are engaged with each other on one side, and are fixed to the other side by caulking with a separation cutting part 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so that the cover body 1250 can fix the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

<Detailed configuration of game board>
A detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 82. FIG. 74A is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 74A is an enlarged front view showing a status indicator in the game board. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely, and FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of each main member constituting the game board as viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 80 is an oblique view of the exploded view of FIG. 79 viewed from diagonally backward.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control handle 461 to drive a game ball as a game medium. A frame-shaped front component member 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the game area 605, a transparent plate-like game panel 599 that is arranged to close the inside of the frame of the front component member 601 on the rear side of the front component member 601, A frame-shaped panel holder 600 that covers the outer periphery of the game panel 599 and holds the game panel 599 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear side of the front component 601, and a back box 621 on the rear side of the panel holder 600. A back unit 1600 that is attached to the rear box 621, and a liquid crystal display device 640 as an effect display means that is detachably supported on the rear side of the back box 621 and can display a predetermined effect image. After covering the lower side of the back unit 1600 and the back box 621 is fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and a board substrate holder 623 by the main control board box 624 is fixed.

  The back unit 1600 in this example is divided into two in the front-rear direction. The back unit 1600 is arranged on the front side in the front-rear direction and includes an annular ornament unit 1700 that decorates the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the annular ornament unit 1700. A front side back unit 1600a having a front side back box 621a that is supported and attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 and a rear side of the front side back unit 1600a are arranged, and the front side of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be decorated. The rear rendering unit 2000 and the rear rear unit 1600b including the rear rear box 621b that supports the floating rendering unit 2000 and is attached to the rear side of the front rear box 621a. A liquid crystal display device 640 is detachably supported on the rear surface of the rear back box 621b.

  In the game area 605 of the game board 4, a frame-shaped center accessory 1400 is disposed at a substantially central portion thereof, and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 from the front (player) through the frame of the center accessory 1400. A stage 1402 on which the game ball can roll is provided on the inner peripheral lower surface in the frame. In addition, a warp inlet 1404 and a gate inlet 1406 are opened at substantially the center of the outer peripheral upper edge of the center accessory 1400, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1404 is supplied onto the stage 1402. Yes. The game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1406 is detected by a predetermined gate sensor 2512 (see FIG. 94), and then released into the game area 605 from the discharge port 1408 arranged at the left end of the center accessory 1400. It has become so.

  The center accessory 1400 is formed with a guide shelf 1410 having a lower left end on the outer peripheral upper edge on the left side of the gate entrance 1406, and an entrance through which a game ball can enter the left end of the guide shelf 1410. 1412 is formed. The game ball that has entered the entrance 1412 is discharged into the game area 605 from the discharge port 1408 from which the game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1406 is discharged. In other words, the game ball that has been driven to the upper side of the guide shelf 1410 once circulates in the center accessory 1400 and then flows down in the game area 605 again.

  On the other hand, the outer peripheral upper edge on the right side from the substantially center in the left-right direction of the center accessory 1400 is substantially along the outer rail 602 so as to form a gap through which the game ball can flow with the outer rail 602 of the front component 601. The game ball that has been driven to the right of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400 flows down to the lower side of the center accessory 1400 along the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400.

  In the game area 605, a winning opening unit 1500 having various winning openings is arranged below the center bonus 1400. The winning unit 1500 includes three general winning ports 1502 that can receive game balls at all times, a first start port 1504 that can receive game balls at all times, and the game balls of the center role 1400. A second start port 1506 and a first start port 1504 or a second start port that can accept or cannot accept a game ball in accordance with a normal lottery result that is entered by entering the gate entrance 1406 and detected by the gate sensor 2512. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the start winning of the game ball to the start opening 1506 (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit”, “small hit”, etc.) And a grand prize opening 1508 through which a ball can be received.

Although not shown, the game board 4 has a plurality of obstacle nails arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 599. Further, the game panel 599 has a transparent plate shape so that the rear side of the game panel 599 can be visually recognized from the player side. The game panel 599 has an opening 599e (FIGS. 84 and 85) that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a predetermined inner peripheral shape.
Are formed, and the center accessory 1400 and the winning hole unit 1500 are fixed to the game panel 599 from the front side corresponding to these openings 599e.

  In addition, the annular decorative unit 1700 of the back unit 1600 attached to the rear side of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 is formed in a frame shape so as to be substantially along the frame of the center accessory 1400, and is formed at the lower right corner in the frame. A water wheel-shaped first movable decorative body 1702 disposed, a second movable decorative body 1704 disposed substantially upward in the center in the left-right direction within the frame, and a surface disposed substantially along the substantially circular gaming area 605. Is a decorative member 1706 that is three-dimensionally shaped in a predetermined shape, and a light emitting decorative substrate 1708 that is disposed on the rear side of the decorative member 1706 and has a plurality of LEDs that can emit light at least forward, and that decorates the decorative member. 78).

  The decorative member 1706 of the annular decorative unit 1700 in the back unit 1600 can be viewed from the player side through the transparent game panel 599, and the rear side of the area where the game ball actually flows down in the game area 605. In addition to being able to decorate in three dimensions, the inside of the game area 605 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LED of the light emitting decoration board 1708 disposed on the rear side. The pachinko machine has a distinctive appearance that is not found in conventional pachinko machines, and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines to attract the player's attention.

  The first movable decorative body 1702 of the annular decorative unit 1700 rotates in a counterclockwise direction at a substantially constant speed, and a plurality of beads are enclosed inside a transparent rotating body. With the rotation, the beads that have risen along the inner peripheral surface of the rotating body are spilled downward inside the rotating body, and the decoration effect is as if the water scooped by the blades of the water wheel dripping. Can be done.

  On the other hand, the second movable decorative body 1704 of the annular decorative unit 1700 is provided with a flower pattern (petal pattern) relief and a vertically movable part, and a solenoid that moves the decorative part up and down. The decoration part is moved up and down by driving the solenoid according to the gaming state, so that the player can be entertained or the arrival of the chance can be recognized.

  In addition, the game board 4 of this example is provided with a status indicator 1800 that is arranged at the lower right of the front component 601 outside the game area 605 and can display the game status. As shown in FIG. 74, this status indicator 1800 is arranged outside the game area 605 and below the front component 601 on the right side of the out port 606, and allows the first start port 1504 to win a game ball. A first special symbol display 1802 that is variably displayed as a trigger, a second special symbol display 1804 that is variably displayed upon a winning of a game ball at the second start opening 1506, and a game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 When the game ball wins the first starting port 1504 while the normal symbol display 1806, the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 are displayed in a variable state, the change display starts. A first special symbol memory number display 1808 for displaying the number of memories for which the start of display has been suspended, a first special symbol display unit 1802 and a second special symbol display unit 1804 while the variable display is being performed. When the game ball wins to 06, the second special symbol memory number display 1810 for displaying the number of memory for which the start of the variable display has been suspended, and the normal symbol display 1806 to the gate entrance 1404 during the variable display In this case, a normal symbol memory number display 1812 for displaying the memory number for which the start of the variable display is suspended is provided.

  The first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804 of the status indicator 1800 are each composed of a 7-segment LED. A special lottery result by the start winning to the mouth 1506 is suggested. Further, the normal symbol display 1806 is configured by LEDs that can emit light in two colors (red and green in this example), and the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 is displayed. It is suggested by the emission color. When a game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 and the normal symbol display 1806 emits light in a color (for example, green) that suggests hitting, the pair of movable pieces 1512 that close the second start port 1506 has a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The first special symbol memory number indicator 1808, the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, and the normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 are each composed of two LEDs. The number of stored memories (for example, a maximum of four) is suggested by the combination.

  In addition to the first special symbol memory number indicator 1808 and the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, the status indicator 1800 is based on start prizes to the first start port 1504 and the second start port 1506. A round that displays the number of times of opening / closing (opening / closing) of the opening / closing piece 1518 when the special lottery result selected is “big hit” in which the opening / closing piece 1518 that opens / closes the big winning opening 1508 of the winning opening unit 1500 opens / closes in a predetermined pattern. It further includes a display 1814 and a small hit display 1816 composed of one LED that is turned on when the special lottery result is “small hit”. The round indicator 1814 includes three LEDs, and can display, for example, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit” depending on the position of the LED to be lit. ing.

[Center character and winning unit]
The center combination 1400 and the prize opening unit 1500 in the game board 4 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 to 76, FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the center accessory and the winning hole unit as viewed from the front side, and FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the center accessory and the winning hole unit as viewed from the rear side.

  First, the center accessory 1400 has the same width as the entire width in the width direction (left-right direction) of the game area 605, and the height from the upper end to the lower end of the stage 1402 is the height of the game area 605. The height is about 3/4 of the height, and the proportion of the game area 605 is high and the frame is formed. Through the frame of the center accessory 1400, the display screen of the floating effect unit 1800 and the liquid crystal display device 640 arranged at the rear can be visually recognized.

  On the upper edge of the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400, there is a warp inlet 1404 that opens to the left at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and a gate inlet 1406 that is disposed below the warp inlet 1404 and also opens to the left. A guide shelf 1410 that is lowered from the lower side of the gate entrance 1406 toward the left is provided, and an entrance 1412 that is disposed at the left end of the guide shelf 1410 and into which a game ball can enter is provided. Further, the upper edge of the outer periphery of the center accessory 1400 is formed in an arc shape so as to be substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 602 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 605 from the middle to the right in the left-right direction. A guide shelf 1414 that forms a gap through which a game ball can pass with the outer rail 602 is provided.

  In the center accessory 1400, the game ball supplied from the substantially horizontal center on the right guide shelf 1414 passes through the right outer periphery of the center accessory 1400 and enters the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400. All the game balls supplied to the left guide shelf 1410 from the substantially horizontal center in the left-right direction enter the entrance 1412.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 is provided with a discharge port 1408 that communicates with the gate inlet 1406 and the entrance 1412 and opens downward on the left edge at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although illustration is omitted, a gate sensor capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1406 is disposed immediately below the gate entrance 1406, and a gate passage is provided below the left guide shelf 1410. The gate passage is bent downward along the left edge (left side frame) of the center accessory 1400 and communicates with the discharge port 1408, and the gate passage is located below the entrance 1412. It comes to communicate with. Thus, the game balls that have entered the gate entrance 1406 and the entrance 1412 arranged at different positions are released into the game area 605 from the same outlet 1408.

  Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, the game balls that enter the gate entrance 1406 and the entrance 1412 and circulate in the gate passage (guidance path) can be viewed from the player side. ing.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a transparent stage 1402 on which the game ball can roll on the inner peripheral lower surface in the frame, that is, the lower edge upper surface. This stage 1402 has a curved surface shape in which the center in the left-right direction is higher than the curved shape in which both the left and right sides are higher, and the width in the front-rear direction is slightly wider than the width of the game ball. It has a step-like shape in which the front side is gradually lower than the side. Specifically, the stage 1402 is disposed at the rearmost part and the first stage 1402a at which the position separated by a predetermined interval in the left-right direction is the lowest, and the position disposed at the lower side and the front side of the first stage 1402a is the lowest. Is composed of a second stage 1402b that is slightly closer to the center than the first stage 1402a, and a third stage 1402c that is disposed below and in front of the second stage 1402b and has the lowest center in the left-right direction. .

  At the left end of the first stage 1402a in the stage 1402, a warp outlet 1416 communicating with the warp inlet 1404 provided at the upper edge of the center accessory is disposed, and a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 1404 passes from the warp outlet 1416. The first stage 1402a is supplied. The game balls supplied to the first stage 1402a roll on the second stage 1402b on the front side and then on the third stage 1402c on the front side after rolling the first stage 1402a in the left-right direction. 1402c is released again into the game area 605, and can be placed at a high probability at the first start port 1504 and the second start port 1506 of the winning port unit 1500 that is arranged below the stage 1402. ing.

  As shown in the figure, the stage 1402 of this example is provided with a specific winning opening 1418 capable of receiving a game ball in the center in the left-right direction of the first stage 1402a. In addition, an entrance hole 1420 through which a game ball can enter is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the second stage 1402b, and communicates with the entrance hole 1420 at the lower side of the third stage 1402c and at the approximate center in the left-right direction. A discharge hole 1422 is provided. Thus, the game ball that has entered the entry hole 1420 of the second stage 1402b is released from the release hole 1422 provided closer to the first start port 1504 than the third stage 1402c, and has a higher probability. The first start port 1504 and the second start port 1506 can be awarded.

  The center accessory 1400 of this example has a flange-like portion 1400a that contacts the front peripheral edge of the opening 599e in the game panel 599, and the flange-like portion 1400a extends in a substantially perpendicular direction and is inserted into the opening 599e of the game panel 599. Insertion portion 1400b and a front protrusion 1400c protruding forward from the flange-like portion 1400a. The insertion portion 1400b is formed with the stage 1402, the warp outlet 1416, and the like, and the front protrusion 1400c has the warp inlet 1404, the gate inlet 1406, the discharge outlet 1408, the guide shelves 1410 and 1414, and the entrance. A mouth 1412 and the like are formed. Also, the inner peripheral surface (cut surface) of the opening 599e in the game panel 599 is hidden from the player by the flange-shaped portion 1400a and the insertion portion 1400b.

  The center accessory 1400 includes a logo decoration body 1424 that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 on the right edge. Although the detailed illustration of the logo decoration body 1424 is omitted, characters in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed so that the player can recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1 at a glance. In addition, each character can be illuminated and decorated in various colors.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 forms a part of the front protruding portion 1400 c so as to protrude below the stage 1402 below the logo decorative body 1424, and the annular decorative unit in the front back unit 1600 a of the back unit 1600. A lower right decoration portion 1428 having a circular opening 1426 that can be inserted through the central portion of the 1700 water wheel-shaped first movable decoration body 1702 is provided. On the upper side of the circular opening 1426 of the lower right decorative portion 1428, a guide rod 1430 for guiding the game ball flowing down along the right inner peripheral surface of the game area 605 to the center side in the left-right direction is provided. Note that a guide rod 1432 is also provided on the left side of the stage 1402 to guide a game ball that forms a part of the front protrusion 1400c and flows down to the center in the left-right direction.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the winning opening unit 1500 is arranged below the center accessory 1400 and from below the discharge port 1408 arranged at the left edge of the center accessory 1400 toward the lower right decorative portion 1428. It has an arc shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the game area 605, and has an asymmetric shape that extends in an arc shape to the upper left with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605 in a front view. The winning opening unit 1500 has a first starting port 1504, a second starting port 1506, and a big winning port 1508 arranged from above on a substantially central axis in the left-right direction of the game area 605. The first starting port A discharge hole 1422 of the center accessory 1400 is positioned immediately above 1504, and an out port 606 is positioned immediately below the big prize opening 1508. Also, in the prize opening unit 1500, one general prize opening 1502 is arranged on the right side of the big prize opening 1508, and two general prize openings 1502 are arranged on the left side of the big prize opening 1508, respectively.

  The winning opening unit 1500 includes a guide portion 1510 for guiding a game ball received in the first start port 1504 to the rear, and a pair of movable pieces that are arranged on both the left and right sides of the second start port 1506 so as to be expandable. 1512, a start-up solenoid 1514 that moves a pair of movable pieces 1512 and is supported on the rear side of the second start-up port 1506, and a game ball that is disposed below the start-up solenoid 1514 and received in the second start-up port 1506 And a second starting port sensor 1516 for discharging the gas downward.

  The pair of movable pieces 1512 in the prize opening unit 1500 is configured such that the upper end side is a free end and the lower end side is rotatable about an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the panel surface of the game panel 599. When the plunger moves in the front-rear direction, the lower ends of the pair of movable pieces 1512 are rotated via a predetermined link mechanism (not shown) so that the upper ends approach or separate from each other. In a normal state, the pair of movable pieces 1512 are in a substantially upright state, so that the second start opening 1506 is closed by the pair of movable pieces 1512 and the first start opening 1504 disposed above the game ball. Is not allowed to be received, and the upper end of the pair of movable pieces 1512 is rotated in a direction away from each other by driving the start opening solenoid 1514 so as to be opened in an inverted C shape (expanded state). As a result, the second start port 1506 is opened and a game ball can be received. When the pair of movable pieces 1512 are expanded, the receivable range of the second start port 1506 is wider than the receivable range of the first start port 1504 in plan view. The probability of receiving a game ball (winning probability) is increased.

  The winning opening unit 1500 further includes an opening / closing piece 1518 for opening and closing a large winning opening 1508 disposed below the second start opening 1506 and opening in a horizontally long rectangular shape, an attacker solenoid 1520 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 1518, A count sensor 1522 for detecting a game ball received in the winning opening 1508 is further provided. The opening / closing piece 1518 is pivotally supported so as to rotate about the lower side extending in the left-right direction as a substantially rotating shaft. When the opening / closing piece 1518 is in a substantially vertical state, the big prize opening 1508 is closed, and the opening / closing piece 1518 is closed. By turning so that the upper side moves forward, the winning prize opening 1508 is opened, and the back of the opening / closing piece 1518 can guide the game ball to the winning prize opening 1508 side. ing.

  In other words, the big prize opening 1508 of the prize opening unit 1500 is normally closed by the opening / closing piece 1518, and when the attacker solenoid 1520 is driven in a “hit” game or the like, the attacker As the plunger of the solenoid 1520 moves in the front-rear direction, the upper side of the opening / closing piece 1518 rotates to the front side via a link mechanism (not shown) so that the big prize opening 1508 can receive a game ball. Yes.

  The winning opening unit 1500 is provided with a guide rod 1524 extending backward from the rear side of the general winning port 1502, and a game ball received in the general winning port 1502 is placed on the game panel 599 by the guiding rod 1524. It is guided to the rear side. As shown in FIG. 82, the guide rod 1524 of the general winning opening 1502 on the right side in front view once guides the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 1502 downward within the thickness of the gaming panel 599. It is configured to be guided to the rear side of the panel 599 so as not to interfere with the first movable decorative body 1602 disposed on the rear side.

  Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1500 is further provided with a guide shelf 1526 at the left end for guiding the game ball released from the discharge port 1408 of the center accessory 1400 to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 605. The guide shelf 1526 is arranged below the guide rod 1432 so that a predetermined gap through which a game ball can pass is formed with respect to the guide shelf 1432 in the center accessory 1400. The prize opening unit 1500 has a plurality of petal-like decorations on the surface thereof, and detailed illustration is omitted, but a light-emitting decoration board is arranged on the back side of the petal decorations, so that the game state and the like Depending on the situation, it is possible to decorate the light in various modes.

[Front component members, gaming panel, panel holder, and panel back plate]
A holding structure of the game panel 599 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component member, a game panel, and a panel holder in the gaming board in a longitudinal direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 84 is a front component member mainly constituting the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the panel, the panel holder, etc., exploded and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 84 viewed from diagonally backward.

  As described above, the game board 4 of the present embodiment includes a plate-like game panel 599 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that detachably holds the game panel 599 from the front. A frame-shaped panel holder 600, and an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 for guiding the game ball in the game area 605, which are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 600 and define the outer periphery of the game area 605. It mainly includes a front structural member 601 and a plate-like panel back plate 635 disposed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600.

  As shown in the drawing, the front component member 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b protruding rearward on the rear surface side. Although the positioning boss 601a and the positioning projection 601b will be described in detail later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b can be positioned with respect to the panel holder 600, the board substrate holder 623, and the game panel 599 disposed on the rear side.

  The gaming panel 599 in the gaming board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin or the like. . The gaming panel 599 is thinner than the panel holder 600 and has a necessary minimum thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when an obstacle nail (not shown) is implanted.

  The gaming panel 599 has a plurality of fitting holes 599a formed by round holes that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 599b that are disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extend in the front-rear direction and extend in the up-down direction. Each is provided. The fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b are arranged outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 600. In addition, the game panel 599 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 599c whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 599c is formed by cutting out approximately half of the board thickness of the game panel 599, and is disposed outside the game area 605, like the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b. The game panel 599 is engaged and fixed to the panel holder 600.

  The game panel 599 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 599d at predetermined positions. The inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 599b protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 603 into the inner rail fixing hole 599d.

  Further, the game panel 599 is formed with a plurality of openings 599e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so as to be provided with a center accessory 1600, a prize opening unit 1500, and the like, and are fixed thereto. A fixing hole is formed at an appropriate position. As shown in the drawing, these openings 599e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer periphery of the gaming panel 599 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer periphery of the gaming panel 599 is connected. The strength of the game panel 599 is prevented from decreasing.

  The panel holder 600 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 599 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (in this example, about 20 mm). The panel holder 600 includes a holding step portion 600a that holds the game panel 599 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 600a. It mainly includes a through-hole 600b penetrating in the direction.

  The holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 599. It is designed to be almost the same surface. Further, the holding step portion 600a has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 83) is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 599. This clearance C can absorb the expansion and contraction even if the game panel 599 expands and contracts relatively due to a temperature change or a change with time. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 599a and the long hole 599b formed in the game panel 599 held by the holding step portion 600a, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 599a. A plurality of projecting pins 599 c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 599 a and the long holes 599 b of the game panel 599 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 600c into the fitting holes 599a and the long holes 599b of the game panel 599, the panel holder 600 and the game panel 599 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with an engaging claw 600d and an engaging piece 600e that engage with the engaging step portion 599c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the engaging claws 600d are arranged on the upper holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 and correspond to the upper engaging step portion 599c of the game panel 599. The holding step portion 600a protrudes forward from the front surface and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 599c. The engaging claw 600d has such a size that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 600. On the other hand, the engagement piece 600e is disposed on the lower holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600, corresponds to the lower engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599, and is played between the front surface of the holding step portion 600a. It is configured such that a predetermined amount extends along the front surface of the panel holder 600 toward the upper side (center side) in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 599c of the panel 599 to be inserted is formed. By engaging the engagement step portion 599c of the game panel 599 with the engagement claw 600d and the engagement piece 600e, the game panel 599 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 600.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a boss insertion hole 600f penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted, and the positioning boss of the front component member 601 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 600f. By inserting 601a, the panel holder 600 and the front structural member 601 are positioned with respect to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 has a mounting support portion 600g that is recessed by a predetermined amount on the rear side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. With this mounting support portion 600g, the rear surface of the panel holder 600 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height and the rear outer peripheral portion protrudes rearward, and the amount of the depression ( Depth) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 1616 (see FIG. 88 and the like) of the front back box 621a in the front back unit 1600a of the back unit 1600 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 600g (in this example, About 2.5 mm, and preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By fixing and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 600g, the fixing portion 1616 can be prevented from protruding rearward from the panel holder 600, and the panel holder 600, that is, the game board 4 is connected to the pachinko machine 1. The game board can be securely installed in the game board installation recess 510.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600, it is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 600g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back body 635. The storage recess 600h is further provided with a locking portion 600i that is disposed so as to penetrate the storage recess 600h in the front-rear direction and that can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The housing recess 202h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by engaging the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 with the locking portion 600i, and the rear surface of the received panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 600.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 600j that are disposed in the mounting support portion 600g on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recessed portion 600h and into which a predetermined screw can be screwed. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 600k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 600j. The positioning hole 600k is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion that protrudes forward from a fixing portion 1616 formed in a front flange shape in the front back box 621a). The illustration is omitted))) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 600k is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that the mounting hole 600j has an inner diameter of a large diameter and a small diameter mixed so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 600j may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 600 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 600l that open to the rear side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 600 is reduced by the thinned portions 600l. It has become. As shown in FIG. 84, these thinning portions 600l are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 600h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 600 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 600 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component member 601 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the ball hitting device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 600 is formed with a thinned portion 600l, so that the mounting holes 600j and the like are formed in a boss shape, and support them and maintain the strength of the panel holder 600. For this reason, lattice-shaped ribs are formed.

  The panel holder 600 is formed with a positioning unit 600m corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 599 on the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 600, an opening 600n that communicates with the out port 606 of the front component 601 and a communication hole 600o that communicates with the foul port 610 of the front component 601 are further provided.

  Next, the panel back plate 635 is disposed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 so as to cover the thinned portion 600l within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the rear surfaces of the housing recess 600h of the panel holder 600 are aligned with each other. A plurality of screw holes 635a that can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface, are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can be screwed with a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a are arranged to correspond to the screw holes 635a. The positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 600i of the panel holder 600, and a concave portion 635d for reducing the amount so as not to penetrate from the front side are provided.

  The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 600j and the positioning hole 600k in the panel holder 600. Similarly to the panel holder 600, the panel back plate 635 is formed into a boss-like portion where the screw hole 635a, the positioning hole 635b and the like are formed by the recessed portion 635d, and supports the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, lattice-shaped ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 600n of the panel holder 600, the communication hole 600o, and the boss insertion hole 600f.

  The panel back plate 635 is housed in the housing recess 600 h of the panel holder 600, and the locking claw 635 c of the panel back plate 635 is locked to the locking portion 600 i of the panel holder 600, thereby being integrated with the panel holder 600. In this state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel holder 600. By integrating the panel holder 600 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 600j and screw holes are arranged on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through-hole 600b over substantially the entire circumference. An attachment hole made of 635a and the like and positioning holes 600k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these attachment holes allows a predetermined member to be attached and fixed at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 599 in the present example, the game panel 599 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 600a of the panel holder 600 from the front, and the engaging claw 600d and the engaging piece 600e, By engaging the engagement step portion 599c, the panel holder 600 can hold the game panel 599, and the front side of the game panel 599 and the panel holder 600 are substantially flush with each other. It becomes possible to set the game panel 599 in the state where the game panel 599 is held in the panel holder 600 without modifying the used obstacle nail planting device, and to install the obstacle nail planting device. An increase in the cost can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 599, the panel holder 600, and the front component member 601, the position of the obstacle nail, the winning hole, and the like may be changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 599 can be used as a replacement part, and the panel holder 600 and the front component 601 can be used as a common part. The panel holder 600, the front component 601 and the like can be made recyclable and the game panel 599 can be recycled. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a game board 4 that can be adapted to various types of machines by simply exchanging only.

  Further, since the panel holder 600 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 600j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as a back unit 1600 and a board substrate holder 623 mounted on the rear surface side of the panel holder 600 according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of the predetermined members are different positions, the panel holder 600 can be shared by the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 600j. It can be made into parts.

[Board substrate holder]
A detailed configuration of the board substrate holder 623 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79, 86 and 87. FIG. 86 is a perspective view shown obliquely from behind with the main control board box fixed to the board holder. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, drawer holder, and main control board box in FIG.

  The board substrate holder 623 is attached and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 600, and as shown in FIG. Is inclined so as to become lower toward the front side, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 599, it can be discharged downward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. . On the rear surface of the board substrate holder 623, a sealed portion 1302 made of a metal plate fixed with a predetermined screw from the rear side and corresponding to the sealing portion 624a provided in the main control board box 624 was formed. A caulking base member 1300 and a drawer holder 1305 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are fixed.

  The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the board substrate holder 623 so that the caulking base member 1300 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the board board holder 623 and the sealing portion of the main control board box 624. 624a is sealed to the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board substrate holder 623 in this state, an opening mark remains on the sealed portion 1302 of the caulking base member 1300, and the main control board box 624 is illegally removed. Whether or not it has been confirmed can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in a state where the main control board box 624 is fixed to the board substrate holder 623, the heads of screws fixing the caulking base member 1300 to the board board holder 623 are connected to the caulking base member 1300, the main control board box 624, and the like. The caulking base member 1300 and the main control board box 624 can be prevented from being removed. In addition, since the caulking base member 1300 is formed of a metal plate, the sealed portion 624a of the main control board box 624 can be firmly sealed by the sealed portion 1302, and a structure in which illegal acts are difficult to be performed. It has become.

[Front side back unit in the back unit]
The front back unit 1600a in the back unit 1600 of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88A is a perspective view of the front back unit viewed from the front side, and FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the front back unit viewed from the rear side. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the first movable decorative body in the front back unit.

  The front back unit 1600a includes an annular decoration unit 1700 that decorates the rear side of the transparent game panel 599, and a box-shaped front back box 621a that supports the annular decoration unit 1700. As shown in the figure, the annular decoration unit 1700 has an outer periphery that is substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the game area 605, and the floating effect unit 2000 and the liquid crystal display device 640 disposed on the rear side are provided from the player side. An opening that can be seen is provided, and is formed in a substantially annular shape (frame shape).

  The annular decorative unit 1700 is arranged at the lower right corner in a front view and rotates in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise direction), and a water wheel-like first movable decorative body 1702 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and is vertically A second movable decorative body 1704 that can be moved to the center, a decorative member 1706 that is disposed in a substantially circular shape substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605, and a “heart” character that is disposed on the right side of the second movable decorative body 1704. A decorative character body 1710 that is three-dimensionally shaped in a shape, and a decorative lens body 1712 that is arranged at a position corresponding to the lower side of the transparent stage 1402 of the center accessory 1400 on the lower side of the center in the left-right direction, and decorates the stage 1402 with light emission , Mainly. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a light emitting decorative substrate 1708 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface on the rear side (lower side) of the decorative member 1706, the decorative font 1710, and the decorative lens body 1712 (FIG. 78). The decorative member 1706 and the like can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  The first movable decorative body 1702 in the annular decorative unit 1700 is disposed on the front and outer circumferences of the transparent rotating body 1714 having a cylindrical disk shape and hollow inside, and rotates integrally with the rotating body 1714. An opaque frame 1716 extending substantially radially; a plate-like base member 1718 disposed on the rear side of the rotating body 1714 and fixed to the rear wall 1614 of the front back box 621a and rotatably supporting the rotating body 1714; A motor 1720 supported by the base member 1718, a drive gear 1722 that rotates together with the rotating shaft of the motor 1720, a first driven gear 1723 that meshes with the drive gear, and a driven gear 1723 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 1723 and has a smaller diameter than the driven gear 1723. The transmission gear 1724 and the transmission gear 1724 mesh with each other and are provided on the rear side of the rotating body 1714. And a rotor side gear 1725 to rotate integrally, the rotating body 1714 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by a driving motor 1720.

  The first movable decorative body 1702 has a waterwheel-like appearance by wrapping the rotating body 1714 with a frame body 1716 (front side and outer periphery). Further, by arranging a driven gear 1723 and a transmission gear 1724 between the rotating shaft of the motor 1720 and the drive gear 1722 that rotates integrally with the rotating body side gear 1725 that rotates together with the rotating body 1714, the rotating body 1714 The position of the motor 1720 can be greatly offset with respect to the rotating shaft, and as shown in the figure, the motor 1720 is disposed as far downward as possible, and the rear back unit is disposed on the rear side. Interference with the floating effect unit 2000 of 1600b is avoided.

  The rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702 has a hollow interior serving as a decorative space SS, and a plurality of the rotating bodies 1714 are arranged along the inner periphery at positions corresponding to the frame body 1716 in the decorative space SS. A housing portion 1726 having an open side facing the rotational direction of the rotating body is formed, and a plurality of beads B (see FIG. 99) are enclosed. Are scooped up along the inner peripheral surface of the rotating body 1714, and the beads B fall from the raised storage portion 1726. As a result, it is possible to produce a decorative effect as if the water scooped by the blades of the water wheel dripped (see FIG. 99).

  In addition, the second movable decorative body 1704 of the annular decorative unit 1700 is provided with a flower pattern (petal pattern) relief and is capable of moving in the vertical direction, and the decorative part 1732 is moved in the vertical direction. And a solenoid 1734. The second movable decorative body 1704 is arranged such that the plunger of the solenoid 1734 is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction, and the distal end of the plunger is connected to the decorative portion 1732 via a predetermined link mechanism, so that the plunger is advanced and retracted. The moving distance of the decorative portion 1732 is increased with respect to the distance. In addition, the decoration portion 1732 is supported in a freely movable state with respect to the link mechanism, and can move not only in a vertical movement but also in a swinging motion to the left and right. The decoration portion 1732 is driven by the solenoid 1734. When you move up and down, you can make a soft movement with a reverberation.

  Further, the decorative lens body 1712 of the annular decorative unit 1700 has a plurality of convex lenses formed on the surface thereof, and can diffuse light from the LED of the light emitting decorative substrate 1708 arranged on the lower side, and the LED When the light is not emitted, the lower side of the decorative lens body 1712 can be clearly seen, and the decorativeness can be prevented from being impaired.

  On the other hand, the front side back box 621a in the front side back unit 1600a has a box shape with the front side opened. The front wall has a substantially rectangular outer peripheral wall 1610, and the rear end of the outer peripheral wall 1610 is closed to form an opening 1612 having a predetermined shape. The rear wall 1614 is provided, and a flange-shaped fixing portion 1616 extending outward from the front end of the outer peripheral wall 1610 along the panel surface of the game panel 599 (panel holder 600). Further, the front back box 621a is provided with mounting bosses 1618 protruding rearward from the four corners of the rear wall 1614, and the rear back box 621b is fixedly attached to the mounting bosses 1618. .

[Rear back unit in the back unit]
The configuration of the rear back unit 1600b of the back unit 1600 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the rear back unit disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the front side, and FIG. 91 is a perspective view of FIG. 90 viewed from the rear side. FIG. 92A is a cross-sectional view showing the floating effect unit in the rear back unit together with the floating effect light emitting substrate, and FIGS. 92A and 92C are diagrams showing the floating body enclosed in the effect space. . FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the floating effect unit.

  The rear back unit 1600b in the back unit 1600 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a plate-like floating effect unit 2000 that extends in the left-right and up-down directions, and is arranged on the upper side of the floating effect unit 2000 toward the floating effect unit 2000. A light emitting substrate 1904 on a floating effect with a plurality of LEDs 1902 capable of irradiating light mounted on the surface, and a plurality of LEDs 1902 that are arranged on the right side of the floating effect unit 2000 and can irradiate light toward the floating effect unit 2000 are mounted on the surface. The floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 having a plurality of LEDs 1902 arranged on the left side of the floating effect unit 2000 and capable of irradiating light toward the floating effect unit 2000, and the floating effect. Unit 2000, light emitting board 1904 on floating effect, right light emission on floating effect It includes a plate 1906, and the side back box 621b after the shaped box front side is open with a floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 such as is capable supported in the predetermined position.

  Further, the rear back unit 1600b includes a lower light emitting substrate 1910 on which a plurality of LEDs that are arranged on the rear side of the floating rendering unit 2000 and can irradiate light forward are mounted on the surface, and the floating rendering unit 2000. And a left light-emitting substrate 1912 on which a plurality of LEDs that are arranged on the rear side and can irradiate light forward are mounted on the surface. The lower light emitting substrate 1910 and the left light emitting substrate 1912 are also supported at predetermined positions inside the rear back box 621b.

  The floating effect unit 2000 in the rear side back unit 1600b has an effect space AS in which the floating body F can float, and performs a predetermined effect by floating the floating body F in the effect space AS according to the gaming state or the like. Is something that can be done. Specifically, in the floating effect unit 2000, a box-shaped and transparent effect space forming member 2002 that forms an effect space AS that is thin in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right and up-down directions, and the floating body F floats in the effect space AS. As described above, the fan 2004 that can supply at least an air flow as a transport flow for transporting the floating body F from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space AS, and the air flow supplied by the fan 2004 are exhausted from the effect space AS to the outside. And at least an exhaust member 2006 in which the floating body F is not allowed to pass.

  An effect space forming member 2002 in the floating effect unit 2000 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and has a bottom portion 2012 having a communication port 2010 having a size through which the floating body F can pass, and from both left and right ends of the bottom portion 2012. A pair of side parts 2014 rising upward, a pair of side parts 2014 and a plate-like front part 2016 closing the front end side of the bottom part 2012, and a pair of side parts 2014 and a bottom part 2012 opposite to the front part 2016 And a plate-like rear portion 2018 that closes the rear end side. The effect space forming member 2002 defines an effect space AS in which the upper part (top) is released to the atmosphere by the bottom part 2012, the pair of side parts 2014, the front part 2016, and the rear part 2018. Since the top of 2002 is covered with the exhaust member 2006, the floating body F is enclosed in the effect space AS. As shown in the figure, the exhaust member 2006 is provided with a plurality of through holes 2006a so that the air flow supplied from the fan 2004 can be exhausted from the effect space AS without delay.

  The bottom portion 2012 of the effect space forming member 2002 is inclined such that the upper surface thereof becomes lower from the lower end of the side portion 2014 on the left and right sides toward the substantially center (communication port 2010) in the left-right direction. A first bottom surface 2012a that decreases from 2014 to the communication port 2010, and a second bottom surface 2012b that decreases from the right side portion 2014 toward the approximate center in the left-right direction are provided. The bottom 2012 is formed with a triangular wall 2020 that protrudes upward to the right of the communication port 2010 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and has a predetermined size (communication port) on the right side of the triangular wall 2020. A ventilation hole 2022 that is twice to three times as large as 2010) is formed. That is, the second bottom surface 2012 b of the bottom portion 2012 is formed so as to become lower toward the vent 2022. Note that a ventilation plate 2026 in which a plurality of through holes 2024 having a size through which the floating body F cannot pass is formed in the ventilation hole 2022.

  In addition, the effect space forming member 2002 is formed so that an air flow path 2028 in which an air flow supplied from the fan 2004 can flow below the second bottom surface 2012b in the bottom portion 2012 extends in the left-right direction. An air outlet 2004 a of the fan 2004 is connected to the right end of the air flow path 2028. The air flow path 2028 communicates with the effect space AS through the vent 2022 below the second bottom surface 2012b, and extends to the left through the lower side of the triangular wall 2020. The communication port 2010 It communicates with and extends further straight to the left. The air flow path 2028 has an arc shape from the position on the left side of the position communicating with the communication port 2010 toward the upper part of the left side part 2014 so as to pass outside the first bottom part 2012a and the left side part 2014. It is formed so as to communicate with the effect space AS through an opening 2014 a formed in the upper part of the left side portion 2014.

  The air flow path 2028 is formed on the lower side of the bottom portion 2012 so that the communication port 2010 opens in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction with respect to the axial direction, and on the right side of the communication port 2010 (upstream side in the air flow). Is formed with a throttle piece 2030 for reducing the cross-sectional area of the air flow path 2028 toward the left side and restricting the air flow flowing through the air flow path 2028. The throttle piece 2030 is formed so as to extend from the upper wall to the lower wall of the air flow path 2028 so that the air flow throttled by the throttle piece 2030 does not easily reach the communication port 2010. Air is sucked into the air flow path 2028 from the effect space AS through the communication port 2010 by the negative pressure generated by the air flow.

  Further, the air flow path 2028 is provided with a backflow prevention member 2034 in which a plurality of through holes 2032 having a size through which the floating body F cannot pass are formed on the right side (upstream side in the air flow) of the communication port 2010. The backflow prevention member 2034 prevents the floating body F from entering the upstream side (fan 2004 side) of the airflow, and the airflow downstream of the backflow prevention member 2034 in the air flow path 2028 is the floating body F. The floating body F is transported to the upper part of the effect space AS through the transport path 2028a. In this example, the backflow prevention member 2034 is a punching metal, and thereby, the opening area by the through-hole 2032 is made as much as possible without reducing the strength as compared with an injection molded product made of resin. It can be made larger, allowing more air flow to pass through.

  In addition, the ventilation plate 2026 fitted into the ventilation hole 2022 of the second bottom surface 2012b in the production space forming member 2002 is disposed at a position where the through holes 2024 are close to the left and right ends as shown in the figure. In the effect space AS in the space forming member 2002, three guide pieces 2036 are provided at positions corresponding to the through holes 2024 of the ventilation plate 2026. The three guide pieces 2036 are formed so as to extend in a direction substantially along the right side wall of the adjacent triangular wall 2020, and the two left guide pieces 2036 have their upper ends rising substantially vertically. It is formed in a bent or curved shape. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position where the upper side extension of the right side wall of the triangular wall 2020 intersects the exhaust member 2006 and the normal line at the opening 2014a of the left side portion 2014 of the air flow path 2028 are the exhaust member 2006. The air flow path 2028, the triangular wall 2020, and the guide piece 2036 are formed so that the positions intersecting with the air flow line 2028 substantially coincide with each other.

  In addition, the production space forming member 2002 in the floating production unit 2000 can be divided into a front side and a rear side at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and the front panel 2002a constituting the front half of the production space forming member 2002 and the latter half And a rear panel 2002b constituting the minutes. The fan 2004 is attached to the front panel 2002a of the effect space forming member 2002.

  Furthermore, the fan 2004 in the floating effect unit 2000 has a suction port 2004b that opens toward the rear, and a fan motor 2004c is disposed substantially at the center of the suction port 2004b. In this embodiment, the fan 2004 is a sirocco fan, which is compact and has excellent quietness.

  In addition, it is desirable that the production space forming member 2002 in the floating production unit 2000 of this example has a thickness in the front-rear direction that can form the production space AS within the range of 10 mm to 50 mm. The floating body F can sufficiently float, and the floating body F overlaps in the front-rear direction so that the floating effect by the floating body F can have a three-dimensional effect. In this example, the thickness is about 20 mm. In addition, the effect space forming member 2002 is visually recognizable from the player side by the center accessory 1400, the annular decoration unit 1700, etc. arranged in front of the floating effect unit 2000. The size is larger than the range Z (within the range surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 92A). In particular, the upper portion of the effect space AS in which the floating body F is conveyed through the air flow path 2028 and the lower portion of the effect space AS that collects the floating body F suspended and dropped in the effect space AS are visible in the range Z. The size is such that it becomes wider.

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and (c), the floating body F enclosed in the effect space AS has a polyhedral shape formed by pressing a circular thin plate into a trapezoidal shape in a side view. The diameter is in the range of 3 mm to 8 mm, preferably in the range of 4 mm to 6 mm, and a specular layer with high reflectivity is formed on the surface. In this example, a transparent PET resin having a thickness of about 0.0758 mm and a diameter of about 6 mm is vapor-deposited with a metal having silver gloss on the inner surface. Moreover, in this example, the floating body F is enclosed within the range of 10 to 1000 in the production space AS.

  More specifically, as shown in the drawing, the floating body F extends outward so as to rise at a predetermined angle from a substantially flat rectangular surface Fa and each side of the rectangular surface Fa, and the rectangular surface Fa. A fan face Fb having an arcuate outer side facing the side of the arc, and an arcuate outer side continuous by the four fan faces Fb is substantially circular in a perpendicular view with respect to the rectangular face Fa. (See FIG. 92C). A metal vapor deposition layer Fc is formed on the inner surface of the floating body F. As a result, no matter how the orientation of the floating body F changes, any surface (rectangular surface Fa or fan surface Fb) can be viewed from the player side, and the floating body F is prevented from becoming difficult to see. Can be done. Further, when the floating body F is viewed, the four fan surfaces Fb can be seen outside the rectangular surface Fa and a fold line can be seen between the fan surfaces Fb. It is possible to make the player feel the shape of the floating body F itself and to enhance the decoration effect of the floating body F.

  The floating effect unit 2000 drives the fan 2004 to supply an air flow into the air flow path 2028 in the effect space forming member 2002, and the air flow supplied to the air flow path 2028 The air will flow in the left direction through the through hole 2032 in the air flow path 2028. Then, the air flow is reduced by the throttle piece 2030 in the air flow path 2028 to increase the flow velocity, so that the air flow path 2028 has a negative pressure, and the air in the effect space AS flows through the communication port 2010. While being sucked into the passage 2028, an air flow having an increased flow velocity is discharged into the effect space AS from the opening 2014a of the left side portion 2014 along the conveying passage 2028a of the air passage 2028 formed in an arc shape. The air flow discharged into the effect space AS is exhausted to the outside through the exhaust member 2006. On the other hand, a part of the air flow supplied from the fan 2004 flows through the through hole 2024 of the ventilation plate 2026 to the left side of the top of the effect space AS, and is exhausted to the outside from the through hole 2006a of the exhaust member 2006. The

  Due to such a flow of air flow, the floating body F arranged in the effect space AS is sucked into the air flow path 2028 from the communication port 2010 opened at the lower part of the effect space AS, and then in the air flow path 2028. The air flow flowing through the air channel 20 is transported and discharged through the transport path 2028a of the air flow path 2028 toward the exhaust member 2006 disposed in the upper part of the effect space AS. Then, only the air flow (conveyance flow) is discharged out of the effect space AS by the exhaust member 2006, so that the floating body F is separated so as to remain in the effect space AS. From the exhaust member 2006, it floats down toward the lower part of the production space AS. At that time, the airflow supplied into the effect space AS from the lower side to the upper side through the ventilation plate 2026 on the second bottom surface 2012b hits the floating body F conveyed to the upper portion, so that the floating body F is The inside of the effect space AS is widely diffused and the falling speed is reduced, so that the floating body F can be floated and dropped in a wider range within the effect space AS.

  By the way, the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 arranged on the outer periphery of the floating effect unit 2000 are mounted with a plurality of LEDs 1902 on the surface as shown in the figure. . Specifically, in each of the light emitting substrates 1904, 1906, and 1908, four LEDs 1902 that emit light of red light, green light, blue light, and white light independently of each other are formed as one LED unit 1903. A plurality of LED units 1903 (for example, six in the upper light-emitting substrate and four in the left and right light-emitting substrates) are provided. With this LED unit 1903, for example, it is easy to make it pink by overlaying white light on red light, or light blue by overlaying white light on blue light, and increase variations in emission color and reflection color. As a result, it is possible to make more colorful lighting decorations. Further, since LEDs 1902 are prepared for the respective emission colors, and the arrangement positions of the LEDs 1902 for the respective emission colors are different from each other, the surfaces of the floating body F made of a polyhedron are reflected to the player side. As a result of different LED 1902, light from various LEDs 1902, that is, light of different colors, can be reflected by one floating body F, and the floating body F has a more colorful feeling or a gorgeous feeling. Thus, the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, the LED 1902 mounted on the floating effect light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 has a luminous intensity within a range of 1000 to 30000 mcd, thereby providing an effect space. The floating body F that floats and falls in the AS can be illuminated and decorated in an optimum state. Note that the lower limit of the luminous intensity of the LED 1902 is set to 1000 mcd. When the luminous intensity is lower than this, the amount of light irradiated to the floating body F decreases, the floating body F becomes dark, and the light reflected on the surface of the floating body F This is because the glittering feeling becomes weaker and the effect of the light emission decoration of the floating body F cannot be expected. In addition, the upper limit of the luminous intensity of the LED 1902 is set to 30000 mcd. When the luminous intensity is higher than this, the transparent production space forming member 2002 that partitions the production space AS out of the light irradiated from the LED 1902 into the production space AS. The amount of light that is irregularly reflected inside increases, and the diffused light causes the front part 2016 and the rear part 2018 of the effect space forming member 2002 to become brighter, making it difficult to see the effect space AS from the player side. This is because the effect may not be obtained.

  As described above, the lower light emitting substrate 1910 and the left light emitting substrate 1912 arranged on the rear side of the effect space forming member 2002 can emit light toward the front (player side), and In the effect space forming member 2002, the lower part for collecting the floating body F and the rear side of the transport path 2028a for transporting the floating body F to the upper part of the effect space AS are arranged. By causing the LEDs mounted on the surface of the light emitting board 1912 to emit light, the lower part of the effect space AS and the conveyance path 2028a can be backlit, and the lower part of the effect space AS and the conveyance path 2028a are viewed from the player side. It can be spicy.

  The rear back box 621b in the rear back unit 1600b is a box shape in which the front and rear directions are thin and the front side is opened, like the front back box 621a, and the outer peripheral wall 1630 and the outer peripheral wall 1630 are substantially rectangular in front view. And a rear wall 1634 having a rectangular opening 1632 that closes the rear end. The rear wall 1634 is formed with a protruding frame 1636 that protrudes rearward along the opening 1632, and the liquid crystal display device 640 is detachably attached to the protruding frame 1636. In addition, a plurality of through holes 1638 are formed at positions below the rear wall 1634 corresponding to the rear side of the fan 2004, and a plurality of through slits 1640 are formed on the upper sides of the outer peripheral wall 1630 and the protruding frame 1636. The air behind the rear back box 621b is sucked into the fan 2004 through the through hole 1638, and the air exhausted from the exhaust member 2006 of the floating effect unit 2000 is passed through the slit 1640. It is discharged out of the rear back box 621.

  Further, the rear back box 621b includes a peripheral control board box 1660 containing the peripheral control board 2600 on the rear side of the rear wall 1634 and below the opening 1632, the main control board 1350, the peripheral control board 2600, and the like. A panel relay terminal board 1352 for connecting the two is attached. The peripheral control board box 1602 and the panel relay terminal board 1352 are arranged at positions that do not block the plurality of through holes 1638 formed in the rear wall 1634.

  The rear back box 621b is provided with a mounted boss 1642 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the rear wall 1638 so as to contact the rear surface of the mounting boss 1618 at a position corresponding to the mounting boss 1618 of the front back box 621a. By screwing a predetermined mounting screw into the mounting boss 1618 of the front back box 621a from the rear surface side of the rear back box 621b through the mounted boss 1642, the rear back box 621b is attached to the front back box 621a. It can be installed.

<Control configuration with main board and peripheral control board>
A detailed control configuration by the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. FIG. 94 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 95 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 2500 including the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 and a group of peripheral control boards 2600. The group of main boards 2500 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral control boards 2600 has stage effects (light emitting decoration, movable effects, sound output, liquid crystal) Display etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 94, the main control board 1350 of the main board 2500 includes a CPU 2502 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2504 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2506 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 2502 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2504, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 2600 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 2506 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 2510 via the relay terminal board 625, the payout control board 1186, and the power supply relay terminal board 2508, and the power for operation is supplied from the power supply board 2510. ing.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a gate sensor 2512 that detects a game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1406 via the panel relay terminal board 1352, and a general prize opening that detects a game ball that has won the general prize opening 1502. The sensor 2514, the first start port sensor 2516 for detecting the game ball won in the first start port 1504, the second start port sensor 1516 for detecting the game ball won in the second start port 1506, and the big prize port 1508 won. A count sensor 1522 that detects a game ball, a specific prize port sensor 2518 that detects a game ball that has won a prize ball 1418 disposed in the center of the stage 1402, and a total number for counting the number of winnings for all the prize holes A winning opening winning number detection sensor 2520 is connected.

  In addition, an operation sensor 2522 for detecting an operation state of an operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via a relay terminal board 625 is provided as an input interface of the main control board 1350. A body frame opening switch 2524 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 2526 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 opens and closes a start opening solenoid 1514 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1512 that can open and close the second start opening 1506 and an opening and closing piece 1518 that can close the prize winning opening 1508. An attacker solenoid 1520 to be driven is connected, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 1350. The output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes a normal symbol display 1806, first and second special symbol indicators 1802, 1804, a normal symbol memory number indicator 1812, a first indicator via a status display board 2528. And the second special symbol memory number display units 1808 and 1810 are connected, and from the main control board 1350, the normal symbol display unit 1806 provided in the status display unit 1800 and the first and second special symbol display units 1802 and 1804 are connected. It is possible to output a drive signal to the like.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 2530 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2532 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2534 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the fire control board 2536. Thus, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side is notified to the hall side (hall computer). The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, a notification that “please take out the game ball from the storage unit 381” is made.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main board 1350 transmits a prize ball command, payout is made in response thereto. An ACK signal is returned from the control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal plate 2538 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning state to the start opening 1504, 1506, the big winning opening 1510, etc., the variation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, and each Various information such as a gaming state based on the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95, the peripheral control board 2600 has electronic components such as a CPU 2602, a ROM 2604, a RAM 2606, etc., and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 2600 is provided with a ROM 2608 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2610 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2608. It has been. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main board 2500 and the peripheral control board 2600 and the main control board 2500 to the peripheral control board 2600. Even if the command is sent, the reverse is not performed. The peripheral control board 2600 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2510 via the power supply relay terminal board 2508.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 2612 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 2612. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2600, and outputs a drive signal to the liquid crystal display device 640. To do. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 2612 includes a CPU 2614, a RAM 2616, a ROM 2618, a VDP 2620, and an image ROM 2622.

  The CPU 2614 of the liquid crystal display control board 2612 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2600 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 2620. The RAM 2616 provides a work area for the CPU 2614 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 2618 holds a program for the CPU 2614 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 2620 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2620, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2620, setting information of various display functions, and the like. The CPU 2614 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2622 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 2612 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 2510 via the peripheral control board 2600 and the power supply relay terminal plate 2508.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a door frame decoration lamp 2624 provided in the door frame 5 and a speaker 163 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. From the peripheral control board 2600, these lamps are connected. A drive signal is output to the speaker 163 and the like.

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to operation buttons 330 including a left button 330a, a middle button 330b, and a right button 330c arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290, respectively. The operation signal of each operation button is input.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2600 has a motor 1720 for rotating the rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702 in the front back unit 1600a and a solenoid 1734 for driving the decoration portion 1732 of the second movable decorative body 1704 in the vertical direction. The drive signal is output to the motor 1720 and the solenoid 1734. Further, the peripheral control board 2600 is connected to the light emitting decoration board 1708 of the annular decoration unit 1700, and each LED is appropriately driven to emit light by outputting a drive signal to the LEDs mounted on the light emitting decoration board 1708. Thus, the decorative member 1706 can be decorated with light emission (light emission effect).

  The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to a fan motor 2004c that drives the fan 2004 in the floating rendering unit 2000 of the rear back unit 1600b. The fan 2004 is driven by outputting a drive signal to the fan motor 2004c. By generating an air flow, the floating body F can be floated in the rendering space AS. The peripheral control board 2600 is connected to the floating effect upper light emitting board 1904, the floating effect right light emitting board 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting board 1908, respectively. The LED 1902 mounted on each board from the peripheral control board 2600 is connected to the peripheral control board 2600. By outputting the driving signal, each LED 1902 is appropriately driven to emit light, and the floating body F floating in the effect space AS can be illuminated (light emission effect).

  Further, a lower light emitting substrate 1910 and a left light emitting substrate 1912 of the rear back unit 1600b are connected to the peripheral control substrate 2600, and each light emission is performed by outputting drive signals to the light emitting substrates 1910 and 1912. The LEDs 19 are mounted on the substrates 1910 and 1912 and driven to emit light, so that the decoration member 1706 of the floating effect unit 2000, the annular decoration unit 1700, the stage 1402 of the center accessory 1400, and the like can be illuminated.

<Game contents>
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle unit 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game with a game ball is started by being driven into an upper portion of a game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 599. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 1400 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When a game ball that flows down the upper side of the center accessory 1400 enters the gate entrance 1406 disposed at the approximate center of the center accessory 1400 in the game area 605 and is detected by the gate sensor 2512, based on the detection signal. The main control board 1350 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 in the status indicator 1800 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 made of one LED emits light alternately in red and green) A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red or green light). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol display 1806 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1512 that close the second starting port 1506 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1512 at the second starting port 1506 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 1400, an area where a game ball can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 1400 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate entrance 1406 or the warp entrance 1404. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 1400 to the left side. It is possible to prevent the game from being reduced by reducing the game operation such that the player is strongly driven and entertaining the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2512 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1806 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is fluctuating is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2512 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as a reserved number) is displayed on a normal symbol storage number display 1812. This normal symbol memory number display 1812 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2512 is discarded.

  The game ball that has flowed down to the guide shelf 1410 at the top of the center accessory 1400 enters from the entrance 1412 and is discharged again from the outlet 1408 on the left side of the center accessory 1400 into the game area 605, and then the center accessory 1400. The lower left guide shelf 1432 and the leftmost guide shelf 1526 of the prize opening unit 1500 are moved to the center of the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 1502 arranged below the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2514, the main control board 1350 pays out a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage unit 381. To be paid out.

  In the case where the game ball driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, the specific winning port 1418, and the big winning port 1508. The game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, the specific winning port 1418, or the big winning port 1510, the winning game ball It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned inward.

  When a game ball that has been driven in on the upper side of the center accessory 1400 enters a warp inlet 1404 that opens to the approximate center in the left-right direction at the upper portion of the center accessory 1400, the game ball enters the frame of the center accessory 1400 through a predetermined warp passage. This stage 1402 is supplied to the first stage 1402a. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage 1402a rolls left and right on the first stage 1402a, then rolls left and right on the second stage 1402b, and further on the third stage 1402c. Will be released into the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400. At this time, when a game ball enters the specific winning opening 1418 opened at the center in the left-right direction of the first stage 1402a and is detected by the specific winning opening sensor 2518, the main control board 1350 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 1186, and the payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command to store a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls. Part 381 is paid out.

  On the other hand, when a game ball enters the entry hole 1420 of the second stage 1402b, it is discharged into the game area 605 from the discharge hole 1422 opened directly above the first start port 1504 at the center of the lower end of the center accessory 1400. Yes. In this example, when a game ball is released into the game area 605 from the discharge hole 1422 of the center accessory 1400, the first start port 1504 is won with a very high probability. When it is received by the mouth 1504 and detected by the first start mouth sensor 2516, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the main control board 1350 and the like. It has become so.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1406 and is detected by the gate sensor 2512 and the “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces that close the second start port 1506 are closed. When the game ball is received by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1516 when the 1512 is expanded for a predetermined time and can be won, the main control board 1350 and the like are Accordingly, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  On the main control board 1350, when a game ball wins the first start port 1504 or the second start port 1506 and is detected by the first start port sensor 2512 or the second start port sensor 1516, the respective start is performed. A predetermined first special random number or second special random number is generated / extracted according to the ports 1504 and 1506. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the display of variation of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1802 or second special symbol display 1804 of the status indicator 1800 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing piece 1518 of the winning unit 1500 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state that operates (for example, a big hit game) is generated, and during that time, a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 1508 so that more game balls can be obtained. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 1508, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  In addition, in the first start port 1504 and the second start port 1506, the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display by the game ball entering the gate entrance 1406. In 1804, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 1504 and 1506 and the first start port sensor 2512 is selected. When the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 1516 or until the special symbol change display is possible, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2512 or the second start port sensor 1516 is used. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted are stored and the display is suspended, and the number of the stored special random numbers is displayed in the first special symbol memory number display. So as to display in the 1808 or the second special symbol memory number display 1810. Each of the first special symbol memory number display 1808 and the second special symbol memory number display 1810 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 1350, the first special random number extracted based on the detection by the first start port sensor 2512 and the second start port sensor 1516 and the special random number of the second special random number are used as predetermined random numbers. By comparing with a judgment table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table), it is determined whether the special random number is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. Whether “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit” is also determined. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 1504 and the second start port 1506 (the special lottery result) is “small hit”. In this case, the main control board 1350 opens and closes an opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing piece 1518 of the winning opening unit 1500 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) (a plurality of times) (For example, twice).

  On the other hand, if the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 1350 opens the open / close piece 1518 of the winning opening unit 1500 and then opens a predetermined time (for example, about 30). Seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 1508, the opening / closing piece 1518 is closed (one opening / closing pattern is 1). Round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds), “2R big hit” is 2 rounds, “5R big hit” is 5 rounds, “15R big hit” is 15 rounds, Each of these is repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Note that, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, with regard to “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time / short table or the like according to the extracted special random number.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number or the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 1504 or the second start port 1506 (special lottery In accordance with the result), in addition to the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 of the status indicator 1800 being variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 640 also responds to a special random number (special lottery result). The effect image is displayed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display device 640, the display of variation of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1808 and 1810, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. Pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 is directly controlled by the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 94). The variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 640 is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 and the liquid crystal display control board 2612 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2600. It has become. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 is controlled. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 640. Also, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 2600 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 1350 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

[Floating effect by floating body]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only an effect by displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 640 but also a predetermined effect can be shown to the player in the floating effect unit 2000 and the like. The operation of the floating body effect unit 2000 together with the effect of the floating body F by the floating effect unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the floating effect unit, FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the floating effect unit following FIG. 96, and FIG. 98 shows the operation of the floating effect unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing shown. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the floating effect unit and the first movable decorative body.

  When the floating effect unit 2000 according to the present embodiment enters a predetermined game state (for example, an appropriate state such as a start winning, “reach”, “hit” game, symbol change, etc.), the peripheral control board 2600 A drive signal for driving the fan motor 2004c of the fan 2004 is output from the fan 2004 to drive the fan motor 2004c. Then, a sirocco fan (not shown) is rotated by driving the fan motor 2004c, and air is sucked from the suction port 2004b, and air flow is supplied from the blowout port 2004a into the air flow path 2028 of the effect space forming member 2002. The In this floating effect unit 2000, when the fan 2004 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 96A, a plurality of floating bodies F gather in the air flow path 2028 below the communication port 2010 due to their own weight. It is in a state.

  Then, the air flow supplied into the air flow path 2028 flows into the transport path 2028a in the air flow path 2028 on the left side of the backflow prevention member 2034 through the backflow prevention member 2034, and rises upward in an arc shape. The air flows to the upper part of the production space AS through the transport path 2028a and is transported upward in the transport path 2028a so that the floating body F gathered below the communication port 2010 is pushed by the flow. (See FIG. 96 (A)). The floating body F that has passed through the arc-shaped conveyance path 2028a in the air flow path 2028 is directed to an obliquely upward direction from the opening 2014a of the left side portion 2014 by an air flow (conveyance flow) flowing through the air flow path 2028. The air is supplied and transported into the AS, and is separated from the air flow toward the effect space AS by the exhaust member 2006 covering the top of the effect space AS. )).

  The exhaust member 2006 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2006a having a size through which the floating body F cannot pass, and the air flow through the through holes 2006a is good to the outside of the effect space AS (the effect space forming member 2002). And the floating body F stays in the effect space AS. The floating body F in contact with the exhaust member 2006 rebounds on the lower surface of the exhaust member 2006 when the floating body F strikes the exhaust member 2006 obliquely by its own weight or by the conveyance of the air flow, and moves downward. It will fall.

  On the other hand, a part of the air flow supplied from the fan 2004 passes through the through hole 2024 of the ventilation plate 2026 disposed on the second bottom surface 2012b of the bottom portion 2012 of the effect space forming member 2002 and then the right side wall of the triangular wall 2020. The plurality of guide pieces 2036 flow toward the upper left side of the effect space AS, that is, toward the supply position (transport position) of the floating body F that is transported by the air flow that flows through the air flow path 2028. The flow (diffusion flow) causes the floating body F separated by the exhaust member 2006 to be blown up from below, so that the falling speed of the floating body F is suppressed and the floating body F spreads in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 97D).

  Thus, the floating body F that has diffused widely in the left-right direction at the upper part of the production space AS falls like a confetti due to its own weight, and the floating body F is spread over almost the entire area of the production space AS. It will float and fall (see FIG. 98 (e)). With these multiple floating bodies F, it is possible to create a new decoration effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and it can surprise and entertain players. .

  The floating body F suspended and dropped on the left first bottom surface 2012a in the bottom portion 2012 of the effect space AS is guided to the communication port 2010 side by the inclination of the first bottom surface 2012a and passes through the communication port 2010 to lower air. The air enters the flow path 2028 and is again conveyed by the air flow flowing through the air flow path 2028 through the arc-shaped transport path 2028a and circulated to the upper part of the effect space AS. Note that, in the air flow path 2028 on the lower side of the communication port 2010 (conveyance path 2028a), as described above, the air flow toward the left side causes the negative pressure in the air flow path 2028 to be higher than the upper side of the communication port 2010. Therefore, the air in the production space AS is sucked into the air flow path 2028 through the communication port 2010, and the floating body F that has fallen on the first bottom surface 2012a due to this flow is also transferred to the communication port 2010. It can be sucked.

  On the other hand, the floating body F suspended and dropped on the second bottom surface 2012b in the bottom portion 2012 is produced by the air flow (diffusion flow) through the through hole 2024 of the ventilation plate 2026 provided on the inclined second bottom surface 2012b. It is blown upwards and sent to the upper part of the production space AS.

  Then, in a state where the floating body F circulates and floats and falls in the effect space AS, the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left are arranged on the upper side and the left and right sides. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 1902 mounted on the surface of the light emitting substrate 1908, the light from the LEDs 1902 is reflected to the player side on the surface of the floating body F, and the player can see the floating body F shining and playing. The person's interest can be strongly attracted (see FIG. 98 (f)).

  In this example, since the floating body F has a polyhedral shape, light from a plurality of LEDs 1902 arranged at different positions on different surfaces can be reflected to the player side, and one floating body F can be It is possible to make it appear in multiple colors, and the player can be more entertained by the sparkling floating body F.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the effect space AS formed by the effect space forming member 2002 is formed wider than the viewable range Z that can be actually visually recognized from the player side. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the floating body F that is intensively transported at the bottom, the floating body F that is collected toward the communication port 2010 in the lower part of the production space AS, and in the visible range Z The floating body F diffused as widely as possible can be shown, and the floating effect of the floating body F by the floating performance unit 2000 can be further enhanced.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first movable decorative body 1702 of the front back unit 1600a arranged on the front side of the floating effect unit 2000 is an effect space forming member in the floating effect unit 2000 as shown in FIG. It is arranged on the front side of the lower right side of 2002. The first movable decorative body 1702 includes a rotating body 1714 having a decoration space SS in which a plurality of beads B are enclosed, and the rotating body 1714 is driven counterclockwise by driving the motor 1720. , The beads B enclosed in the interior of the lower part of the decoration space SS are scooped and accommodated in the accommodation part 1726 formed on the inner periphery, and the beads B fall downward from the accommodation part 1726 in the upper part of the decoration space SS. It is supposed to let you. Thereby, it is possible to express as if the rotating body 1714 formed in a water wheel shape is scooping water with a scraper.

  On the other hand, since the ventilation port 2022 of the floating effect unit 2000 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating body 1714, the floating body F blown upward by the air flow (diffusion flow) that has passed through the ventilation port 2022 is viewed from the front. As if it were being blown up from the rotating body 1714, the player can be given the illusion that the beads B in the rotating body 1714 are being blown up in the production space AS. ing. As a result, the floating effect can be achieved such that the beads B that have fallen on the axis in the direction in which the diffusion flow flows inside the rotating body 1714 are blown up together with the diffusion flow as the floating body F in the effect space AS. By floating the body and moving the first movable decorative body 1700, the effect by the floating body F can be made more conspicuous and the impact can be enhanced, and the flying effect of the floating body F can be enjoyed.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 640, the second movable decorative body 1704, and the floating effect unit 2000 in the present embodiment correspond to the effect presenting means of the present invention, and the fan 2004 in the present embodiment corresponds to the conveying means of the present invention. . Further, the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 in the present embodiment correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  In addition, the airflow which distribute | circulates the inside of the air flow path 2028 (conveyance path 2028a) in this embodiment turns into a conveyance flow, the airflow induced | guided | derived by the guide piece 2036 through the through-hole 2024 of the ventilation plate 2026 in this embodiment. Corresponds to the diffusion flow.

  In addition, the space sandwiched between the first bottom surface 2012a and the triangular wall 2020 of the effect space forming member 2002 in the present embodiment is at the collection position where the floating body F is collected, and the top of the effect space AS, that is, the exhaust member 2006. The positions at which are arranged correspond to the supply positions where the floating body F is conveyed and supplied.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that are driven into the upper part of the game area 605 by the player's operation are guided on the guide shelf 1410, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 640, the floating effect unit 2000, and the like. 1414 is guided to the outer peripheral side in the game area 605, the width in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 640 and the floating effect unit 2000 disposed below the guide shelves 1410 and 1414 is set to the game area 605. The width of the liquid crystal display device 640, the floating effect unit 2000, and the like can be made wider, and the effect image and the floating body F presented thereby can be easily seen. Can do. In addition, it is possible to divide the area where the game balls flow down in the game area 605 into the upper side and the lower side by the guide shelves 1410 and 1414, and the player by the driving operation aims at the upper side of the guide rack 1410. It can be a movement of a game ball (in which the player's intention is largely reflected), and an accidental movement caused by a failure nail or the like is caused to the game ball below the guide shelves 1410 and 1414 (release port 1408). Therefore, it is possible to attach the sharpness by the movement of the game ball between the upper side and the lower side of the game area 605, and the player can be entertained. Accordingly, the effect image presented by the liquid crystal display device 640 and the floating effect unit 2000, the floating effect of the floating body F, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game ball guided to one of the outer peripheral sides by the guide shelf 1410 and entering the entrance 1412 is once guided to the rear side from the front surface of the game panel 599 by the guide path, and then again through the discharge port 1408. Since the game area 605 is released into the game area 605, it is clear to the player that the game area 605 is divided between the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf 1410 (the lower side of the discharge port 1408). It is possible to recognize, and even if the movement of the game ball is different between the upper side and the lower side of the guide shelf 1410, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a fun game ball that is different from the above, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, a gate entrance 1406 and a warp entrance 1404 are arranged above the entrance 1412, and a second start port 1506 and the like where the acceptance probability is changed by the entry of a game ball into the gate entrance 1406 below the stage 1402. Therefore, the player first causes the game ball to be driven to aim at the gate entrance 1406, and when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1406, the player then performs a drive operation to aim at the warp entrance 1404. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1404 rolls on the stage and then returns to the game area 605. At that time, the game that has entered the gate entrance 1406 first. With the ball, the acceptance probability of the second start opening 1506 is changed and can be accepted, and the game ball is accepted into the second start opening 1506 with a high probability. Can prevent the player from getting bored by preventing the game ball driving operation from becoming monotonous, and can change the game ball driving operation and the gaze position of the player. It becomes possible, and a tempo can be given to the game, so that it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the gate entrance 1406 and the warp entrance 1404 are arranged above the entrance entrance 1412, that is, above the game area 605 separated by the guide shelf 1410, the game ball is thrown in. It is easy to aim directly at the gate entrance 1406 and the warp entrance 1404 by the operation, the player's skill can be suitably exerted, and a game ball driving operation can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can do.

  Further, the game ball guided to the other outer peripheral side (right outer peripheral side in front view) by the guide shelf 1414 is guided into the game area 605 below the liquid crystal display device 640 and the floating effect unit 2000. When the game ball is guided to the other outer peripheral side, the game ball flows down to the lower part of the game area 605, and the movement of the game ball can be made enjoyable. The game ball can be driven carefully so that the game ball is not guided to the side, it can be prevented from playing casually, and the player can be expected to concentrate on the game. Can do.

  In addition, the other outer peripheral side is arranged on the opposite side to the side where the inner rail 603 is arranged, that is, the other outer peripheral side is arranged in the direction in which the game ball is driven in the game area 605. If the game ball is easily inserted, the game ball is easily guided to the other outer periphery by the guide shelf 1414, and the movement of the game ball can be prevented from being enjoyed. It is possible to give a sense of tension to the driving operation and to prevent the interest from being reduced by concentrating on the game. In addition, in order to allow a game ball to enter the entrance 1412, the gate entrance 1406, the warp entrance 1404, etc., it is necessary to adjust the game ball driving operation appropriately. It is possible to give a degree of difficulty, and to prevent the player from getting bored of the driving operation and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the game ball guided in the taxiway can be visually recognized from the player side, some players may have anxiety because the game ball disappears, or the pachinko machine 1 may have distrust. It is possible to prevent the player from playing, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by playing the game with peace of mind. In addition, since the game ball guided in the guide path can be viewed from the player side, the game ball that enters the entrance 1412 and circulates toward the release port 1408 can be released from the release port 1408. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game ball to be played, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 640 is disposed behind the effect space AS, and the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be visually recognized through the effect space AS, and the front side of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed. Since the floating body F will float, the floating effects by the floating body F can be made more diverse, the impact of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and it is hard to get tired and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a direction in which a plurality of floating bodies F flow from the bottom to the top in a production space AS that is independent of the game area 605 into which game balls are driven (flying direction). In addition, a rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702 having a decorative space SS inside is disposed on the downstream side of the substantially axial line in the flying direction, In the decoration space SS, a plurality of beads B that fall on the axis of the flight direction due to the rotation of the rotating body 1714 are provided. Therefore, the beads B that have fallen on the axis of the flying direction inside the rotating body 1714 It is possible to produce the floating body F in the AS as if it floated in the flight direction, and the floating body F and the first movable decorative body 1702 move the floating body F. More prominently it is possible to increase the impact and, to delight floating effect of the float F is interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decoration part 1732 of the second movable decorative body 1704 that is movable in a direction approaching or moving away from the axis of the flight direction is arranged upstream of the flight direction in which the floating body F is blown up by the diffusion flow. By moving the decoration portion 1732 back and forth with the floating body F floating due to the diffusion flow, the floating body F floating in the flight direction hits the decoration portion 1732 so that the decoration portion 1732 can appear to be shaken. Further, the effects produced by the floating body F can be made more diverse, and it is possible to entertain the player and to prevent the player from getting bored and to reduce the interest of the player. In addition, since a plurality of petals are formed on the decoration portion 1732, it is possible to make the petals appear to sway due to the contact of the floating body F, and the movement softens or attracts the player's attention. The pachinko machine 1 that can suppress the interest of the game from being reduced and enhance the decorativeness of the second movable decorative body 1704 to attract the player's interest strongly can be obtained.

  Furthermore, the floating effect can be made more conspicuous by the floating body F that floats in the flight direction in the effect space AS, and the rotating body 1714 and the decorative portion 1732 that move to synchronize with the floating of the floating body F. The floating body F that moves in the game area 605, the first movable ornament body 1702, and the second movable ornament body 1704 can increase the impact of appearance than other pachinko machines, and increase the appeal to the player. The possibility of selecting this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play can be increased.

  In addition, since the direction of the rotation axis of the rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702 is directed to the player side, that is, the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the rotating body 1714 is directed to the player side. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the rotating body 1714 and to recognize that the rotating body 1714 is rotating. The effect by 1714 can be further enhanced. Further, since the rotation axis of the rotating body 1714 is directed in the front-rear direction, the diameter of the rotating body 1714 can be increased without increasing the dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a larger rotating body By 1714, the 1st movable decoration body 1702 can be made conspicuous, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with a higher impact.

  Furthermore, a plurality of accommodating portions 1726 are provided along the inner periphery of the decorative space SS in the rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702, and the opening of the accommodating portion 1726 is directed to the rotation direction of the rotating body 1714. Since the opening of the accommodating portion 1726 faces in the left-right direction at the lower portion of the rotating body 1714, the beads B are easily accommodated in the accommodating portion 1726, and the decoration is accompanied with the rotation of the rotating body 1714. The accommodating portion 1726 moves so as to scoop the beads B that have fallen into the lower portion of the space SS, and the beads B are accommodated in the accommodating portion 1726. Then, as the rotation of the rotating body 1714 progresses, the accommodating portion 1726 rises and the opening thereof faces upward, and the beads B accommodated in the accommodating portion 1726 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 1726 without falling down. It becomes a state. Further, when the rotating body 1714 rotates and the housing portion 1726 moves upward from the rotation center of the rotating body 1714, the opening of the housing portion 1726 starts to tilt in the left-right direction, and is housed in the housing portion 1726 when tilted to some extent. When the beads B spill out and the storage portion 1726 passes through the apex of the rotating body 1714, the opening faces downward, and the beads B are discharged from the storage portion 1726 and fall in the decoration space SS. Thus, the beads B can be dropped toward the axis of the flight direction, and the above-described effect by the floating body F can be realized with certainty.

  In addition, since the rotating body 1714 of the first movable decorative body 1702 is provided with a radial frame body 1716, the shape of the frame body 1716 can make the rotating body 1714 look like a water wheel. The design can be enhanced, and by making the player recognize the shape of the first movable decorative body 1702, it is possible to easily imagine the intention of the production by the shape, and the movement of the first movable decorative body 1702 It is possible to suppress the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 1400 and the front back unit 1600a that can shield at least the conveyance path 2028a in an invisible manner are provided on the front side of the effect space forming member 2002 that forms the effect space AS. Since the floating body F that is arranged and transported via the transport path 2028a can be hidden from the player, the floating body F is supplied to the player indefinitely in the production space AS. It is possible to show the decoration effect as it is, and it is possible to think “What's going on?”, Etc. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the viewable range Z in the effect space AS is defined by the center accessory 1400 and the front side back unit 1600a, the effect space that forms the effect space AS by the air flow supplied from the fan 2004 to the floating body F. Even if it is transported and released into the effect space AS from the opening 2014a of the left side portion 2014 in the forming member 2002, the floating body F transported in the effect space AS is suspended until falling into the viewable range Z. In the production space AS, it is possible to diffuse in the front / rear and left / right directions, and in the viewable range Z in the production space AS, it is possible to show the player the floating body F that is widely diffused and falls and floats in a wide range. The player's interest can be more strongly attracted by the falling floating body F. In addition, since the floating body F floats and falls in the visually recognizable range Z in the production space AS, the floating body F floats at a biased position in the production space AS, so that the decoration production effect by the floating body F is achieved. Can be prevented, the effect of decoration production by floating of the floating body F can be enhanced, and the player can be entertained by various productions to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced. Can do.

  Further, since the lower part and the upper part of the production space AS are shielded from the player side by the center actor 1400 and the front side back unit 1600a, the floating body F is delivered to the transport path 2028a side at the lower part of the production space AS. However, it is possible to make the place where the floating body F is supplied from the transport path 2028a side in the upper part of the production space AS, and the like, and the floating body F floats and falls in the viewable range Z in the production space AS. It is difficult to understand the mechanism, and the player can be wondered, and interest in the floating body F or the like can be increased to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the lower part and the upper part of the production space AS are shielded by the center actor 1400 and the front side back unit 1600a, the lower part of the production space AS is floated and dropped widely for delivery to the conveyance path 2028a side. The space for collecting the floating body F that has been collected can be secured, and a space for widely diffusing the floating body F supplied from the conveyance path 2028a side in the production space AS is provided above the shielded production space AS. Thus, in the viewable range Z of the production space AS formed by the center actor 1400 and the front side back unit 1600a, only the widely diffused floating body F can be reliably shown to the player side. It is possible to prevent the floating body F from floating at an uneven position in the production space AS and thereby the decoration effect effect by the floating body F will be reduced. Rukoto can, out is possible to increase the decorative performance effect due to the stray drop of the floating body F.

  In addition, since the center role 1400 having the stage 1402 as the rolling surface is provided, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of playing games similar to the conventional pachinko machine having the stage. It is possible to prevent the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine from feeling uncomfortable, and to easily select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the production space AS arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 1400, the production space AS is arranged on the rear side of the stage 1402, and the player side When viewing the stage 1402, it is possible to make the illusion that the floating body F is floating and falling on the stage 1402, and to show the player an effect that has never been seen in a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to entertain the player with a high impact production, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

  Further, since the decorative member 1706 of the annular decorative unit 1700 in the front back unit 1600a is disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599 via the front back box 621a, the decorative member 1706 is disposed on the rear side of the transparent game panel 599. The decorative member 1706 makes it possible to give the player an impression at a glance which is completely different from a flat picture or decoration applied to the surface of the game panel like a conventional pachinko machine. While attracting interest and increasing expectations for this pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating, and the appeal to the player increases, making this pachinko machine 1 larger than other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to be played can be increased.

  In addition, since the front back unit 1600a includes the light emitting decoration substrate 1708 supported on the rear side of the decoration member 1706 by the front back box 621a, the decoration member 1706 can be decorated with light emission by the light emission decoration substrate 1708. The decoration member 1706 can be displayed more beautifully, and the player can be strongly attracted, the expectation for the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and the appealing power can be enhanced more than other pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine to play The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected. In addition, a light emitting decorative substrate 1708 is provided on the rear side of the decorative member 1706, and even if the decorative member 1706 is formed of a light-transmitting member such as a transparent or translucent member, the decorative member 1706 can be provided by emitting light. Since it is difficult to look at the production space forming member 2002 arranged on the rear side, the function as a shielding member can be achieved. Therefore, the decorative member 1706 is configured by a member having translucency, so that the front shielding member can be used. The design of the decorative member 1706 can be enhanced without reducing the function, and the pachinko machine 1 with high impact that can attract the player's interest more strongly can be obtained.

  Further, since the decorative member 1706 and the light emitting decorative substrate 1708 are supported inside the front side back box 621a, the front side back box 621a attaches the decorative member 1706 and the light emitting decorative substrate 1708 to the annular decorative unit 1700 (front side back unit 1600a). The decorative member 1706 as the front shielding member and the light emitting decorative substrate 1708 can be attached simply by attaching the front back box 621a to the rear side of the panel holder 600, and assembling the pachinko machine 1. Such troubles can be simplified, and when a problem occurs in them, they can be easily removed, and maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, the front back box 621a supports the decorative member 1706 and the light emitting decorative board 1708 inside and supports the rear back box 621b supporting the effect space forming member 2002 on the rear side. The production space forming member 2002 and the decoration member 1706 are surely supported at the determined positions across the box 621a, and the decoration member 1706 accurately determines the desired position of the production space AS in the production space forming member 2002. The pachinko machine 1 which can be shielded and reliably achieves the above-described effects by setting the viewable range Z in the production space AS within the intended range without fail. Further, the decorative member 1706, the light emitting decorative substrate 1708, the effect space forming member 2002, and the like can be attached at a time only by attaching the front back box 621a to the rear side of the panel holder 600. It is possible to simplify the labor involved.

  Further, since the rear back box 621b is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600 by supporting the rear back box 621b on the rear side of the front back box 621a, the back box 621 on the rear side of the panel holder 600 is provided. The mounting space is only a space for mounting the front back box 621a, and it is possible to suppress the front back box 621a from being reduced, and thus the viewable range Z in the effect space AS is relatively small. The floating body F can be prevented from becoming small, the floating body F floating and falling in the production space AS can be prevented from being difficult to see, and the floating body F can be easily seen. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Further, the production space forming member 2002, the floating production upper light emitting board 1904, the floating production right light emitting board 1906, the floating production left light emitting board 1908 and the like are supported in the box-like rear back box 621b. Even if the outer shape of the space forming member 2002 is a shape other than a rectangular shape, the entire outer shape can be adjusted by the rear back box 621b. When the space forming member 2002 is attached to the rear side of the panel holder 600, the effect space forming member 2002 is provided. It is possible to eliminate unnecessary protrusions related to the light emitting board 1904, the floating effect right light emitting board 1906, the floating effect left light emitting board 1908, and the like. Improves workability by preventing it from getting in the way and coming into contact with other members when installed on the island equipment of the hall. It is Rukoto, it can be prevented from being damaged in contact with.

  In addition, the effect space forming member 2002 and the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are supported in the rear back box 621b. 621b makes it easy to establish a positional relationship between the effect space forming member 2002 (effect space AS) and the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908. The light from the light emitting board 1904 on the stage, the right light emitting board 1906 on the floating stage, and the left light emitting board 1908 on the floating stage can be surely irradiated to the intended position in the stage space. A player's interest by surely enjoying the lighting decoration effect of the floating body F by the substrate 1906 and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 It can be suppressed. Further, at least the effect space forming member 2002 and the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 can be unitized by the rear back box 621b, and the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. And labor related to maintenance can be simplified.

  Furthermore, since the fan 2004 that supplies the air flow to the effect space forming member 2002 is supported, the fan 2004 is also supported by the rear back box 621b simply by supporting the effect space forming member 2002 in the rear back box 621b. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the labor involved in assembling and maintaining the pachinko machine 1. Further, the production space forming member 2002 also integrally supports the conveyance path 2028a (air flow path 2028), and the positional relationship among the production space forming member 2002, the fan 2004, and the conveyance path 2028a can be changed. Since it can be reduced as much as possible, the pachinko machine 1 can suppress the occurrence of variations in the transport and supply position of the floating body F, and ensure that the intended effect of the floating body F is exhibited. In addition, since they can be integrated into a unit, it is possible to simplify the labor related to the assembly and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the same manner as the above-described effects.

  In addition, since the fan 2004 that supplies the air flow as the transport flow for transporting the floating body F is supported by the effect space forming member 2002 that defines and forms the effect space AS, the fan 2004 that is a generation source of vibration is provided. It can be firmly fixed and supported, and vibrations from the fan 2004 can be transmitted to other members to prevent the looseness of screws, joints, etc., and the occurrence of problems due to fatigue of the members. More specifically, the effect space forming member 2002 is formed in a container shape (box shape) in order to partition the effect space AS inside, and has higher rigidity than a simple plate member. By supporting the fan 2004 on the forming member 2002, vibration from the fan 2004 can be easily suppressed, and transmission of vibration to other members can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of defects by avoiding the loosening of the parts and the like and the occurrence of fatigue of the members.

  In addition, since the floating body F can be easily diffused in a narrow range by the air flow that has passed through the vent 2022 in the effect space forming member 2002, the center accessory 1400, the rear back unit 1600a, etc. in the upper part of the effect space AS The range shielded by the player can be made smaller, the viewable range Z from the player side in the production space AS can be relatively widened, and the floating body F that floats and falls in a wider range is given to the player. It is possible to show and enjoy the decoration effect by the floating body F, and since the visible range Z in the effect space AS becomes wider, the impact is made by making the effect space AS (floating object F in the effect space AS) more conspicuous. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced and attracts the player's interest strongly.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the communication port provided at the lower part of the effect space AS in the effect space AS that is visible from the player side independently of the game area 605 into which the game ball is to be shot. The floating body F that has entered the transport path 2028a from 2010 is transported through the transport path 2028a and discharged into the effect space AS from the opening 2014a provided in the upper part of the effect space AS, so that the effect space AS moves from the upper part to the lower part. The floating body F falls toward it. At that time, the surface of the floating body F is formed into a polyhedral shape, and the engagement of the air resistance, lift and the like becomes uneven depending on the direction of the falling floating body F, so that the floating body F is linear or parabolic according to gravity. Instead of falling in a shape, it will fall so as to float while swinging, and the movement of the floating body F floating in the production space AS can show the player an effect that has not existed in the past pachinko machine In addition, it is possible to suppress the interest of the game by attracting the player's interest by various effects, and to reduce the fun of the game to the effect space AS where the floating body F floats and falls, A plurality of colors of light are emitted from the effect right light emitting substrate 1906 and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908, and the floating body F can be illuminated and decorated by the light. The positional relationship between the light source (LED 1902) and each floating body F in the floating effect light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 is gradually changed by floating and dropping freely in the exit space AS. The lighting condition of the floating body F will always change, and the lighting decoration of the floating body F can be varied, and the entertainment for the game is reduced by showing the player a variety of effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the surface of the floating body F has a polyhedral shape, any orientation of the floating body F can be seen from the player side, and the floating surface F can float in the effect space AS. It is possible to prevent the falling floating body F from being hard to see from the player side, and the floating body F falling and falling can be surely shown to the player. It can suppress that the interest with respect to falls.

  In addition, the surface of the floating body F has a polyhedral shape, and even if the floating bodies F contact and overlap each other in the production space AS and the conveyance path 2028a, the floating bodies F can be prevented from adhering to each other. Since it can be prevented from becoming a lump, the floating body F can be surely floated and dropped in the production space AS, and the intended production can be surely shown to the player to prevent the interest from deteriorating. can do. In addition, it is desirable to use a material that is not easily charged with static electricity as the floating body F. As a result, the floating bodies F adhere to each other or the floating body F adheres to the conveyance path 2028a, the production space forming member 2002, or the like. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

  Furthermore, since the floating body F is configured as a plate, that is, a plate-like body, it is possible to reduce the weight with respect to the volume (volume) of the floating body F, and the air when falling in the effect space AS Resistance and lift can be easily received, and the floating time of the floating body F is lengthened or the floating feeling of the floating body F is increased, so that the player is more entertained and the interest in games is reduced. can do. Further, since the weight of the floating body F can be reduced, when the floating body F falls in the production space AS or when the floating bodies F collide with each other, the floating body F, the production space forming member 2002, etc. It is possible to reduce the impact, and it is possible to prevent the floating body F, the production space forming member 2002, and the like from being damaged or damaged by the impact, thereby preventing a malfunction.

  In addition, since the floating body F is formed of resin, the weight of the floating body F can be reduced compared to the case of forming the floating body F, and air resistance and lift force when falling in the production space AS. It becomes possible to make it easy to receive, and there can exist the same effect as the above-mentioned. Moreover, since the floating body F is made of resin, the floating body F can be easily formed into a multi-surface shape, and the floating body F that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  Furthermore, since the maximum outer shape of the floating body F is in the range of 3 mm to 8 mm, when the floating body F is dropped in the production space AS, the floating body F is surely dropped and fluctuated with the fluttering and fluttering. It is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movement of the floating body F and to reduce the interest in the game. Incidentally, the maximum outer shape of the floating body F is set to 3 mm or more. If the floating body F becomes smaller than this, the player becomes difficult to recognize the shape of the floating body F falling in the effect space AS, and the floating body F This is because the air resistance and lift with respect to the size (weight) of the airframe are relatively small, so that the floating body F is difficult to float and fall and the movement of the floating body F may not be enjoyed. In addition, the maximum outer shape of the floating body F is set to 8 mm or less. When the floating body F becomes larger than this, the floating body F flutters in the production space AS due to the relationship between the air resistance and lift with respect to the size of the floating body F. There is a risk that the floating body F will not be fully enjoyed, and the floating body F will be heavy, so the air flow for transport must be increased and the fan 2004 will be enlarged. In addition, the production space AS must be increased in proportion to the floating body F, and the size of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction is increased, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the existing island facility. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible. In addition, it is desirable that the maximum outer shape of the floating body F is within a range of 4 mm to 6 mm, and thereby the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, since the floating body F is configured by a substantially flat rectangular surface Fa and a fan surface Fb extending from each side of the rectangular surface Fa, the floating body F is viewed in a plan view (in the rectangular surface Fa). (Viewed in the vertical direction) can be substantially circular, and the side view can be substantially trapezoidal, and any surface (rectangular surface Fa or fan surface Fb) no matter how the floating body F changes its orientation. Can be visually recognized from the player side, and the floating body F can be prevented from becoming difficult to see. In addition, since the four fan surfaces Fb rise at a predetermined angle with respect to the rectangular surface Fa, and the floating body F becomes a container shape, air resistance and lift easily change depending on the orientation of the floating body F. In addition, it can be more easily dropped.

  Further, when the floating body F is viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rectangular face Fa, the four fan faces Fb can be seen outside the rectangular face Fa and a fold line can be seen between the fan faces Fb. It can look like a jewel (a jewel that has been subjected to a predetermined cut such as a brilliant cut), can make the shape of the floating body F itself entertained by the player, and is decorated by the shape of the floating body F It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing by increasing the effect. Furthermore, since the floating bodies F are in a container shape, even if the floating bodies F come into contact with each other, they can hardly be overlapped with each other, and the floating bodies F can be effectively prevented from becoming a lump. The floating body F can be reliably suspended and dropped in the effect space AS.

  Furthermore, since the vapor deposition layer Fc is provided on the inner side where the angle between the rectangular surface Fa and the fan surface Fb of the floating body F is less than 180 degrees, the floating bodies F are in contact with each other, or the floating body F forms a production space. Even if it contacts the member 2002 or the conveyance path 2028a, it is possible to prevent the vapor deposition layer Fc from coming into contact, and it is possible to prevent the vapor deposition layer Fc from being rubbed and peeled off from the floating body F. Further, since the vapor deposition layer Fc of the floating body F can be prevented from being rubbed, the powder of the vapor deposition layer Fc adheres to the production space AS, the conveyance path 2028a, and the like due to the rubbed vapor deposition layer Fc. Can be prevented.

  Further, the metal deposition layer Fc provided on the surface of the floating body F can strongly reflect light from the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908, etc. Since the floating body F can be brilliantly illuminated to the player, the appeal power of the floating fall effect by the floating body F can be further enhanced, and the player can be more entertained and the interest in the game can be reduced. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the metal vapor deposition layer Fc is provided on the surface of the floating body F, even if a resin is used for the base material of the floating body F, a gloss like that made of metal can be obtained. The weight of the floating body F can be further reduced compared with the case where all of the metal is formed of metal, and the floating body F is surely suspended and dropped in the production space AS. The pachinko machine 1 which can play reliably is realizable.

  Furthermore, since the effect space forming member 2002 allows the dimension of the effect space AS in the front-rear direction to be within a range of 10 mm to 50 mm, the floating body F that is floating and falling can be easily placed in different positions in the effect space AS in the front-rear direction. The floating effect of the floating body F is enhanced by the floating effect, and the depth effect is further enhanced with respect to the light emitting decoration by the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908. The pachinko that can suppress the interest of the game by making the player more entertaining, and that makes the floating body F floating and falling in the production space AS more conspicuous is more appealing to the player Machine 1 can be used. Incidentally, the lower limit of the dimension in the front-rear direction in the production space AS is set to 10 mm or more. If the size is smaller than this, the floating body F is difficult to move freely in the production space AS, and the movement of the floating body F can be enjoyed. This is because the floating body F hardly diffuses in the effect space AS. In addition, the upper limit of the dimension in the front-rear direction in the production space AS is set to 50 mm or less, and if it is larger than this, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the entire pachinko machine 1 becomes too large, and the existing island equipment in the game hall is used. This is because the pachinko machine 1 may not be installed. In addition, it is desirable to make the dimension of the front-back direction in production space AS into the range of 15 mm-30 mm, and this can show the effect mentioned above reliably.

  In addition, since the upper part (top) of the production space forming member 2002 is released to the atmosphere, and the air in the production space AS can freely move (in and out), the floating body F floats in the production space AS. It is possible to make the fall more natural, and to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with the movement of the floating body F and reducing the interest, and from the fan 2004 into the conveyance path 2028a. Since the floating body F is conveyed by the supplied air flow (conveyance flow), the air flow released along with the floating body F from the opening 2014a of the conveyance path 2028a is released to the atmosphere. Can be discharged to the outside of the production space forming member 2002 (production space AS), and the air flow is prevented from stagnation in the conveyance path 2028a and the floating body F is reliably conveyed by the air flow. It can be.

  Further, since the floating body F is transported by the air flow supplied from the fan 2004, the air flow may be at least strong enough to transport the floating body F, and the air flow is generated. It is not necessary to precisely control the fan motor 2004c or the like to be performed, and it is possible to use inexpensive control and suppress an increase in cost related to the pachinko machine 1. In addition, since the transport path 2028a serving as the flow path of the floating body F to be transported is transported outside the effect space forming member 2002, that is, outside the effect space AS, the float body F is transported. It is possible to reduce the influence of the air flow in the production space AS as much as possible due to the strength of the air flow, and the floating of the floating body F in the production space AS greatly changes due to the air flow. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that reliably floats the floating body F without causing a sense of incongruity in the production space AS can be obtained.

  Further, in the transport path 2028a, an air flow for transporting the floating body F flows from the upstream side of the communication port 2010 toward the opening 2014a disposed on the downstream side of the communication port 2010. The air pressure in the conveyance path 2028a becomes lower than the atmospheric pressure in the effect space AS due to the flow, and the air in the effect space AS is sucked into the transfer path 2028a through the communication port 2010, and this air flow causes the effect. The floating body F suspended and dropped to the lower part of the space AS can be sucked into the conveyance path 2028a, and the floating body F suspended and dropped can be reliably collected and delivered to the conveyance path 2028a, and the conveyance path 2028a. The floating body F can be reliably conveyed from the lower part to the upper part of the production space AS.

  In addition, since the exhaust member 2006 is disposed so as to cover the air space upper portion of the effect space forming member 2002, only the air flow discharged from the opening 2014a into the effect space AS through the conveyance path 2028a is provided in the effect space. The floating body F discharged to the outside of the forming member 2002 (the production space AS) and conveyed by the air flow can be retained in the production space AS, and the problem is caused by the floating body F that has come out of the production space forming member 2002. It is possible to prevent the occurrence, and it is not necessary to provide a resistor or space for attenuating the air flow, and the rendering space AS can be relatively widened. It can be floated, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, on the bottom surface forming the bottom portion 2012 of the effect space forming member 2002 (effect space AS), a first bottom surface 2012a that is inclined so as to become lower toward the communication port 2010, and a second bottom surface that becomes lower toward the vent hole 2022. 2012b, the floating body F suspended and dropped to the first bottom surface 2012a side of the production space forming member 2002 is delivered to the conveyance path 2028a through the communication port 2010, and the upper part of the production space AS. On the other hand, the floating body F suspended and dropped toward the second bottom portion 2012b is blown up in the effect space AS by the airflow flowing into the effect space AS through the vent 2022, and the effect space The floating body F supplied from the upper part of the AS and the floating body F blown up from the lower part of the production space AS are shown to the player at the same time. It can either be a movement of the body F and complicated, to delight player by the movement of the floating body F is interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, since the floating body F transported in the transport path 2028a is transported and supplied into the effect space AS through the opening 2014a provided in the side portion 2014 that forms the side surface in the effect space forming member 2002, for example, the transport path Compared with the case where the discharge port (corresponding to the opening) of 2028a communicates with the upper portion (top) of the effect space forming member 2002, the length of the conveyance path 2028a can be shortened, and the pachinko machine 1 The production space AS can be relatively widened by reducing the proportion of the conveyance path 2028a in the game, and the floating body F can be floated and dropped in a wider range to entertain the player.

  In addition, a reverse flow preventing member 2034 is provided upstream of the conveyance path 2028a so that an air flow can pass and the floating body F cannot pass through the communication space 2010. Since the floating body F delivered to the conveyance path 2028a side can be prevented from moving upstream by the backflow prevention member 2034, it moves to the upstream side of the conveyance path 2028a for some reason and reaches the fan 2004. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fan 2004 from being defective.

  In addition, since the throttle piece 2030 is arranged on the upstream side of the communication port 2010, the flow rate is increased by restricting the air flow (conveyance flow) by this throttle piece 2030, and the communication space 2010 passes through the communication port 2010 from the effect space AS side. Thus, the floating body F that has entered the transport path 2028a can be transported more vigorously toward the opening 2014a. Further, the throttle piece 2030 can increase the speed of the air flow in the vicinity of the communication port 2010, and the pressure in the transport path 2028a near the communication port 2010 can be further reduced. The suction force from the rendered production space AS can be increased, and the floating body F suspended and dropped on the communication port 2010 in the production space AS is sucked into the conveyance path 2028a and produced via the conveyance path 2028a. It can be reliably conveyed to the upper part of the space AS.

  In addition, the throttle piece 2030 is arranged on the upstream side of the communication port 2010, and the flow range (range in the cross-sectional area) of the air flow that flows in the vicinity of the communication port 2010 in the conveyance path 2028 can be narrowed. Can be made difficult to flow to the communication port 2010 side, the air flow is prevented from flowing to the effect space AS side through the communication port 2010, and the floating body F passes from the effect space AS side through the communication port 2010 to the conveyance path. The floating body F can be transported by reliably entering (delivering) the 2028 side.

  Furthermore, since the flow direction of the airflow discharged from the opening 2014a of the conveyance path 2028a is set to be obliquely intersecting the exhaust member 2006, a lateral force is exerted on the floating body F that contacts the exhaust member 2006. The floating body F can be prevented from being pressed against the exhaust member 2006 by the air flow, and can be prevented from sticking to the lower surface of the exhaust member 2006. Further, since the exhaust member 2006 can be prevented from being blocked by the floating body F, the airflow can be reliably discharged out of the effect space AS, and the effect is generated by the airflow through the transport path 2028a. The floating body F transported to the upper part of the space AS can be suspended and dropped in the effect space AS, so that the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  The light sources of the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are LEDs 1902, and the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904 disposed on the outer periphery of the effect space forming member 2002, the floating effect. Since the right light emitting substrate 1906 and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 can be made thin, the proportion of the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 is reduced. It is possible to relatively widen the production space AS, and the floating body F can be floated in a wider range to increase the impact on the player. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating. Further, the light source of the floating effect light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 is the LED 1902, and when emitting colored light, the color wavelength range is compared with other light sources. Since it is narrow, the player can feel the color strongly, the floating body F that is decorated with light from the LED 1902 can be made more conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the player and can do.

  In addition, since the luminous intensity of the LED 1902 in the floating effect light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 is in the range of 1000 to 30000 mcd, the floating body F that floats and falls in the effect space AS. It is possible to embody a pachinko machine 1 that can be decorated with light emission in an optimal state and can reliably achieve the above-described effects. Note that the lower limit of the luminous intensity of the LED 1902 is set to 1000 mcd. When the luminous intensity is lower than this, the amount of light irradiated to the floating body F decreases, the floating body F becomes dark, and the light reflected on the surface of the floating body F This is because the glittering feeling becomes weaker and the effect of the light emission decoration of the floating body F cannot be expected. In addition, the upper limit of the luminous intensity of the LED 1902 is set to 30000 mcd. When the luminous intensity is higher than this, the transparent production space forming member 2002 that partitions the production space AS out of the light irradiated from the LED 1902 into the production space AS. The amount of light that is irregularly reflected inside increases, and the diffused light causes the front part 2016 and the rear part 2018 of the effect space forming member 2002 to become brighter, making it difficult to see the effect space AS from the player side. This is because the effect may not be obtained.

  Further, since the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are arranged on the left and right sides and the upper periphery of the effect space forming member 2002, the effect space forming member 2002 is provided. It is possible to secure a space below the production space forming member 2002, and it is possible to easily dispose a part of the air flow path 2028, the fan 2004, and the like. The machine 1 can be more easily embodied.

  In addition, the communication port 2010 in the effect space forming member 2002 is arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction, the fan 2004 is arranged below the effect space forming member 2002 and on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and further transported Since the path 2028a is arranged on the side opposite to the side on which the fan 2004 is arranged, the fan 2004, the communication port 2010, and the conveyance path 2028a are arranged in this order from the right side in the front view on the lower side of the production space forming member 2002. As a result, the arrangement for transporting the floating body F from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space AS can be made compact, and the effect space AS can be made relatively smaller. The floating effect of the floating body F can be more enjoyed by making it wider.

  Further, since the air vent 2022 for supplying an air flow (diffusion flow) into the effect space AS is disposed on the fan 2004 side, that is, on the upstream side of the communication port 2010 with respect to the communication port 2010, the air passage 2022 passes through the communication port 2010. Therefore, the floating body F transported in the transport path 2028a does not reach the vent 2022, and the vent 2022 can be prevented from being blocked by the floating body F. (Diffuse flow) can be reliably supplied into the effect space AS, and the floating body F suspended and dropped in the effect space AS can be diffused and suspended by the air flow that has passed through the vent 2022.

  In addition, a plurality of colors of light are emitted from the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 into the effect space AS, and the floating position of the floating body F or the floating body F Since the color of the light irradiated to the floating body F and the color of the light reflected to the player side by the floating body F change depending on the orientation of the floating body F, one floating body F has various colors. It is possible to embody a light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) that changes in a complicated manner that could not be achieved with conventional decorative bodies, It is possible to increase the impact on the player and suppress the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, since multiple colors of light are emitted from the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 to the effect space AS, a plurality of colors are applied to one floating body F. Of each color (the overlapping state of each color light, for example, the part where the red light and the white light overlap becomes pink, or the part where the red light and the green light overlap each other becomes yellow. ), The surface of one floating body F can be decorated with light emission in a plurality of colors, and a plurality of floating bodies F are suspended and dropped in the production space AS, and depending on the positional relationship between the floating bodies F Since the shadow of the floating body F due to the light from the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating lighting right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating lighting left light emitting substrate 1908 is projected onto the other floating body F, By projecting shadows onto the body F, it becomes possible to make the light-emitting decoration more complex and versatile, making it a decoration that attracts the player's attention, making the player entertained and entertaining. It can suppress that it falls.

  In addition, the floating body F is always transported from the upper part to the lower part in the effect space AS by transporting the float F from the lower part to the upper part of the effect space AS through the transport path 2028a arranged outside the effect space AS. It is designed to float in the direction (floating and fall), making it difficult for the player to see the place where the floating body F is being transported (so that it cannot be seen). It is possible to show the decoration effect that the floating body F is supplied one after another without any limitation, and it is possible to think “What is going on?”, Etc., and enjoy the floating by the floating body F It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. For example, if the floating body F is regarded as “petals”, “snow crystals”, “confetti”, “fallen leaves”, etc., as described above, the floating body floats and falls, so the player On the other hand, the floating fall of the floating body F can be shown without a sense of incongruity, the movement of the floating body F floating with a natural feeling can be enjoyed, and the interest can be prevented from being lowered due to the sense of incongruity.

  Further, since the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are arranged on the left and right or the upper periphery of the effect space AS, the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, The effect right light emitting board 1906 and the floating effect left light emitting board 1908 can prevent the floating body F floating in the effect space AS from being difficult to see, and the floating effect upper light emitting board 1904 and the floating effect right light emitting board 1906. And the light from the floating effect left light emitting board 1908 is directly irradiated to the player to prevent the floating body F from being in a backlit state, or the rear side of the effect space AS is irradiated and the rear of the effect space AS. As the side becomes brighter, the floating body F can be prevented from becoming darker and the floating body F becoming hard to see, and the floating body F can be decorated with light emission in a better state. It can, to delight decorative effects by float F is interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, four LEDs 1902 that independently emit red light, green light, blue light, and white light on the floating effect light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908, respectively. Since one LED unit 1903 is formed and a plurality of the LED units 1903 are provided, the light emitted from the floating light emitting substrate 1904, the floating light right emitting substrate 1906, and the floating light left light emitting substrate 1908 Colored light and white light are included, and the portion of the floating body F irradiated with the colored light is irradiated with white light, so that the color of the colored light is diminished (for example, red light becomes pink) It is possible to make the color of the soft feeling (light blue if it is blue light), and the floating body F can be decorated with various colors. That together Impacts can be made to be strongly attracted the attention of the player is increased, interest in the game and difficult to get bored by a variety emission decoration can be suppressed.

  Also, the LED 1902 that emits colored light and white light is provided independently, and the light source positions of the colored light and white light are different from each other, so that the irradiation range of the colored light and the white light are likely to be different. Therefore, the floating body F that floats and falls in the effect space AS has a soft color at the position where the respective irradiation ranges overlap, and colored light or white at the position of only one irradiation range. It becomes a color according to light, and the decoration aspect of the floating body F can be changed in various ways with the floating fall of the floating body F. Can do.

  Furthermore, since the floating light emitting board 1904, the floating light right light emitting board 1906, and the floating light left light emitting board 1908 are provided with a plurality of LED units 1903 composed of four-color LEDs 1902, each color to emit light has a floating effect. The light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are substantially evenly distributed, and the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are distributed. In other words, it is possible to suppress a specific color from becoming strong depending on the area in the effect space AS, and it is possible to uniformly irradiate the effect space AS with a plurality of colors of light. Enjoy the luminous effect of floating body F by making the desired luminous decoration no matter where the floating body F is floating and falling. Rukoto can.

  Further, the surface of the floating body F is a polyhedron, and the color and amount of light from the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 are different depending on each surface. , The light emitting decoration in one floating body F feels different for each surface, the floating body F can be decorated in various ways, and the decoration effect by the floating body F can be more enjoyed, It can suppress that a player's interest falls. Compared with the case where the floating body F is a sphere, the reflected light is reflected when reflecting the light emitted from the floating light emitting substrate 1904, the floating light right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating light left light emitting substrate 1908. It becomes possible to make it difficult to be dispersed (diffused), to maintain a large amount of reflected light entering the player's field of view, and to suppress the glittering feeling caused by the floating body F, and to float in the production space AS It is possible to make the floating body F to stand out more and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the effect space AS is formed by the transparent effect space forming member 2002, the floating effect upper light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emission arranged outside the effect space AS. It becomes possible to irradiate the light from the substrate 1908 into the effect space AS without fail, and the light emitting decoration of the floating body F by the light emitting substrate 1904, the floating effect right light emitting substrate 1906, and the floating effect left light emitting substrate 1908 is ensured. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by showing the player various illuminating effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the floating body F is conveyed from the collection position in the effect space AS to the supply position through the air flow path 2028 arranged outside the effect space AS. In the production space AS, the floating body F always floats and moves in the direction from the supply position to the collection position, and the floating body F is continuously supplied to the player in the production space AS one after another. It is possible to show “What is going on?” And the like, and it is possible to entertain the floating by the floating body F and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, since the supply position is arranged in the upper part of the production space AS and the collection position is arranged in the lower part, the floating body F naturally falls to the collection position (communication port 2010) by dropping due to its own weight. The floating body F can be easily collected at the collection position, and the floating body F is naturally floated (falling) with no sense of incongruity according to its physical properties (for example, shape, material, weight, etc.) It is possible to make the player entertained and to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating. For example, when the floating body F is considered to be “petals”, “snow crystals”, “confetti”, “fallen leaves”, etc., as described above, the floating body F floats and falls toward the collection position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the floating fall of the floating body F, and it is possible to suppress the interest from being lowered by the more natural movement of the floating body F.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the floating body F has a high light reflectivity, the surface of the floating body F floating in the production space AS is equipped with illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. The light from the produced LED 1902 and the like can be reflected to the player side. At that time, the floating body F floats loosely, so that the reflection direction of the light changes, and the floating body F glitters. The floating body F can be shown beautifully and the effect of the floating body F can be further enhanced, and the player can be entertained and can be prevented from being less interesting. .

  Further, as described above, since the light is reflected on the surface of the floating body F, the floating body F floats while shining, so that the floating body F in the effect space AS can be recognized even from a distance. It is possible to increase the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to be played by attracting the interest of the game to increase the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the floating body F is transported by using the air flow supplied from the fan 2004 as a transport flow, it is sufficient that the strength of the transport flow is at least strong enough to transport the floating body F. The floating body F is transported via the air flow path 2028, and the floating of the floating body F in the effect space AS does not change greatly due to the strength of the transport flow, so that the fan 2004 that generates the transport flow is generated. It is not necessary to precisely control the fan motor 2004c, and it is possible to use inexpensive control and suppress an increase in cost related to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the floating body F is transported by a transport flow (air flow) flowing through the air flow path 2028, and the floating body F can be transported only by the fan 2004 and the air flow path 2028 that generate the transport flow. It is possible to simplify and downsize the configuration relating to the transport and supply means, to prevent the effect space AS from becoming relatively narrow, and to make the effect space AS as wide as possible. Thus, it is possible to increase the impact on the player by floating the floating body F, and it is possible to entertain the floating movement of the floating body F and prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since an air flow is used as the transport flow, there is a problem even if a medium of the transport flow enters the effect space AS, compared to the case where liquid or powder is used as the transport flow. Can be made as small as possible, and the floating body F can be easily separated from the transport stream, and even if air as the medium of the transport stream adheres to the floating body F, there is a problem. The floating body F can be satisfactorily suspended in the effect space AS, and a desired effect can be reliably obtained.

  Furthermore, since the floating body F is separated from the air flow (conveyance flow) to the production space AS side by the exhaust member 2006 disposed at the top of the production space forming member 2002, the floating space F is caught by the conveyance flow and floated. It is possible to prevent the body F from being transported out of the effect space AS and causing problems due to the floating body F transported out of the effect space AS. In addition, since the floating body F is separated from the transport flow by the exhaust member 2006, the strength of the air flow (transport flow) flowing through the air flow path 2028 is set to a sufficient strength that the floating body F can be reliably transported. Even in the case of the transport flow, the floating member F can be reliably separated by the exhaust member 2006. That is, since the floating body F can be reliably conveyed through the air flow path 2028, it is possible to prevent the floating body F from stagnation on the air flow path 2028, and to the supply position in the effect space AS. The floating body F can be reliably floated by transporting and supplying F, and the effect of the floating body F can be reliably exhibited to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Further, since the exhaust member 2006 is a porous member having a plurality of through-holes 2006a through which the floating body F cannot pass, when the air flow (transport flow) transporting the floating body F hits the exhaust member 2006, the transport flow The medium passes through the through hole 2006a and flows to the opposite side of the exhaust member 2006, and the transported floating body F cannot pass through the through hole 2006a of the exhaust member 2006 and remains in the effect space AS. The floating body F is separated from the transport flow by the member 2006. Therefore, by using the exhaust member 2006 as the separating means, it is possible to reliably separate the floating body F from the transport flow and prevent the occurrence of problems, and the space occupied by the exhaust member 2006 is made as small as possible. Since the production space AS can be relatively widened, the floating body F can be floated in a wider range, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

  In addition, the exhaust member 2006 is disposed on the top of the effect space forming member 2002 that is released to the atmosphere, and the air flow is guided and released from the air flow path 2028 toward the top, so that the air flow is reduced. It can be discharged to the outside through the top exhaust member 2006, and at the same time, the floating body F separated by the exhaust member 2006 can fall down due to its own weight and can satisfactorily fall in the effect space AS. The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be obtained.

  Furthermore, the floating body F is conveyed from the collection position to the supply position by the air flow supplied from the fan 2004, and the floating body F supplied to the supply position is diffused and suspended in the effect space AS. It is not necessary to separately provide a means (for example, a fan) for supplying a diffusion flow in the floating means, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, Since the space related to the diffusion floating means can be suppressed and the production space AS can be relatively widened, the floating body F is floated in a wider range to increase the player's interest. Can be attracted.

  In addition, the bottom portion 2012 of the effect space forming member 2002 that forms the effect space AS is inclined so as to become lower toward the communication port 2010, and the floating body F that has floated and dropped in the effect space AS is inclined. The floating body F can be collected by being guided to the communication port 2010 by 2012, and the floating body F can be passed through the communication port 2010 into the conveying path 2028a of the air flow path 2028. Further, the top of the production space forming member 2002 is open to the atmosphere, and the air in the production space AS can freely move, so that the floating fall of the floating body F in the production space AS feels more natural. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the movement of the floating body F and deteriorating the interest.

  Furthermore, since the effect space forming member 2002 forms a substantially plate-like effect space AS that expands in the left-right and up-down directions, the proportion of the effect space AS in the game area 605 in the front view is relatively increased. Since the production space AS can be made conspicuous, the production by the floating body F floating in the production space AS can also be made noticeable, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be obtained. . In addition, since the production space AS is substantially plate-shaped, the production space forming member 2002 can prevent the size in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unnecessarily large. It can also be installed on island facilities.

  Further, since the air flow path 2028 communicates with the collection position of the effect space AS through the communication port 2010 in a direction intersecting the air flow direction, the air flow path 2028 (conveyance path 2028a). It is possible to suppress the flow of air flowing through the inside of the effect space AS from the collection position, and the air pressure in the air flow path 2028 is changed from the pressure at the collection position in the effect space AS by the flow of air. Therefore, the floating body F suspended and dropped at the collection position can be sucked into the air flow path 2028 together with the air in the production space AS, and the floating body F is reliably collected and transported in the transport path 2028a. be able to.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the transport path is formed by the air flow path 2028, it is possible to prevent the floating body F being transported from being detached from the air flow path 2028 (transport path 2028a). Further, since the transport path 2028a extends in a substantially arc shape, the floating body F can be smoothly transported in the transport path 2028a, and the floating bodies F being transported and the air flow path 2028 and the floating body can be transported. Contact and collision with F can be reduced or reduced as much as possible, and the floating body F can be prevented from being worn or damaged.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko gaming machine cut by a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko gaming machine (main control board box portion). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is the top view (A), front view (B), perspective view (C) seen from the front of the slide member provided in the ball hitting device, and AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B). FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. (A) is a front view of a game board, (a) is a front view which expands and shows the status indicator in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in Fig.74 (a). It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 79 as viewed obliquely. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character and the winning a prize mouth unit from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at the center role and the winning a prize mouth unit from the back side. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected and shown in the vertical direction in the state which assembled the front structural member in the game board, the game panel, and the panel holder. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member, game panel, panel holder, etc. which mainly comprise a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 84 from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view shown from diagonally behind in the state which fixed the main control board box to the board | substrate holder for boards. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view showing the board substrate holder, the drawer holder, and the main control board box in an exploded perspective view after FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front back unit from the front side, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the front back unit from the back side. It is sectional drawing which shows the internal structure of the 1st movable decoration body in a front side back unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side back unit for every structure and was seen from the front side. It is the perspective view which looked at FIG. 90 from the rear side. (A) is sectional drawing which shows the floating production | presentation unit in a back side back unit with a floating production light emission board | substrate, (a) And (c) is a figure which shows the floating body enclosed in production | presentation space. It is a perspective view of a floating production unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure around the main board | substrate in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of a floating production | presentation unit. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation of the floating effect unit following FIG. 96. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation of the floating effect unit following FIG. 97. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a floating production | presentation unit and a 1st movable decoration body.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 460 Handle device 461 Operation handle part 599 Game panel 599e Opening part 600 Panel holder 600a Holding step part 600b Through-hole 601 Front component 602 Outer rail 603 Inner rail 605 Game Area 606 Out port 621 Back box 640 Liquid crystal display device (effect display means, effect presentation means)
800 Prize ball unit 1350 Main control board 1400 Center accessory 1402 Stage 1402a First stage 1402b Second stage 1402c Third stage 1404 Warp inlet 1406 Gate inlet 1408 Discharge outlet 1410 Guide shelf 1412 Advance entrance 1414 Guide shelf 1416 Warp exit 1500 Prize entrance Unit 1502 General winning port 1504 First starting port 1506 Second starting port (variable winning port)
1508 Grand prize opening 1512 Movable piece 1518 Opening / closing piece 1600 Back unit 1600a Front side back unit 1600b Rear side back unit 1700 Annular decoration unit 1704 Second movable decoration body (production presentation means)
1902 LED
1903 LED unit 1904 Light-emitting board (light-emitting means) for floating production
1906 Floating effect right light emitting board (light emitting means)
1908 Floating effect left light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
2000 Floating production unit (production presentation means)
2002 Production space forming member (production presentation means)
2004 Fan (conveying means)
2006 Exhaust member 2010 Communication port 2012 Bottom portion 2014 Side portion 2016 Front portion 2018 Rear portion 2022 Vent port 2024 Through hole 2026 Vent plate 2028a Transport path 2032 Through hole 2036 Guiding piece F Floating body AS Production space

Claims (1)

A game area in which game media is driven by a player's operation,
A frame-shaped front component member having an outer rail and an inner rail capable of guiding a game medium to an upper part in the game area, and defining an outer periphery of the game area;
A plate-like shape that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and has an opening having a predetermined shape at an inner periphery penetrating in a front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the inside of the game area, and defining a rear end of the game area. A game panel,
An effect presentation means that is supported on the rear side of the game panel so as to be visible from the player side through the opening, and can present a predetermined effect to the player according to the game state;
The predetermined presentation presented by the presentation presenting means is formed in a frame shape so as to cover the opening of the gaming panel so as to be visible from the player side and supported by the gaming panel from the front side, A guide shelf that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel and is driven into the upper part of the game area on the upper side of the presentation means, and is guided by the guide shelf to the outer peripheral side of the game area. The entrance where the game medium guided to the outer peripheral side is allowed to enter, the game medium that has entered the entrance is guided to the rear side of the front side of the game panel, and then lower than the upper part of the effect presentation means. A guidance path that can be guided, and a center accessory having at least a discharge port that discharges the game medium guided by the guidance path into the game area on the front surface of the game panel. Gaming machine and features.

Images